Ec PDF

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION EC
EC
CONTENTS
APPLICATION NOTICE .............................................. 8 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 34
How to Check Vehicle Type ..................................... 8 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................... 34
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 37
Conventional Throttle Control Fail-safe Chart ........................................................ 38
Basic Inspection ..................................................... 38
INDEX FOR DTC ........................................................ 9 Symptom Matrix Chart ............................................ 56
Alphabetical Index .................................................... 9 Engine Control Component Parts Location ............ 61
DTC No. Index ......................................................... 9 Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 64
PRECAUTIONS ........................................................ 10 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ............. 65
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” ECM Terminals and Reference Value ..................... 65
and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” .................... 10 CONSULT-II Function ............................................. 71
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
of Engine ................................................................ 10 ... 79
Precautions .............................................................11 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 13 Mode ....................................................................... 81
PREPARATION ......................................................... 14 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE... 83
Special Service Tools ............................................. 14 Description .............................................................. 83
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 14 Testing Condition .................................................... 83
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .................................. 15 Inspection Procedure .............................................. 83
System Diagram — QG13DE Engine Models ........ 15 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 84
System Diagram — QG16DE and QG18DE Engine TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
Models .................................................................... 16 DENT ......................................................................... 87
Vacuum Hose Drawing ........................................... 17 Description .............................................................. 87
System Chart ......................................................... 18 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 87
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System .................... 18 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM ..................... 88
Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................... 19 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 88
Air Conditioning Cut Control ................................... 20 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 91
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Component Inspection ............................................ 95
Speed) .................................................................... 21 DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR ...... 96
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE .............................. 22 Component Description .......................................... 96
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................... 22 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Idle Air Volume Learning ........................................ 23 ... 96
Fuel Pressure Check .............................................. 25 On Board Diagnosis Logic ...................................... 96
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check ............................. 26 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................. 96
Injector ................................................................... 26 Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 98
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ............ 29 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................. 99
Introduction ............................................................ 29 Component Inspection .......................................... 101
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ............................. 29 DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) ........................... 30 (ECT) SENSOR (CIRCUIT) ..................................... 102
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ........................... 31 Component Description ........................................ 102
EC-1
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 140
. 102 Overall Function Check ......................................... 140
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 102 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 143
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 103 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 144
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 104 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 151
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 105 Component Inspection .......................................... 152
Component Inspection .......................................... 106 DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL ............................... 153
Removal and Installation ...................................... 106 Component Description ........................................ 153
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR. 107 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Description ........................................ 107 .153
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 153
. 107 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 153
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 109 Component Inspection .......................................... 162
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 110 Removal and Installation ....................................... 163
Component Inspection .......................................... 112 EGR SYSTEM ......................................................... 164
Removal and Inspection ....................................... 113 Description ............................................................ 164
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) ....................... 114 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 116 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL
Component Inspection .......................................... 117 SOLENOID VALVE .................................................. 172
Removal and Installation ...................................... 117 Description ............................................................ 172
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 118 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 120 Removal and Installation ....................................... 177
Component Inspection .......................................... 122 IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV)-AUXILIARY
Removal and Installation ...................................... 123 AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE ................................ 178
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 124 Description ............................................................ 178
Component Description ........................................ 124 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 124 .178
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 124 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 179
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 125 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 180
Component Inspection .......................................... 128 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH ............ 185
Removal and Installation ...................................... 129 Component Description ........................................ 185
DTC P0500 VSS ...................................................... 130 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 186
Component Description ........................................ 130 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 187
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 130 Component Inspection .......................................... 189
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 130 PNP SWITCH .......................................................... 191
Overall Function Check ........................................ 131 Component Description ........................................ 191
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 132 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 133 .191
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE .............. 135 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 192
System Description ............................................... 135 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 193
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 135 INJECTOR CIRCUIT ............................................... 195
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 135 Component Description ........................................ 195
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ........ 139 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 196
System Description ............................................... 139 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 197
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Inspection .......................................... 199
. 139 Removal and Installation ....................................... 199
EC-2
START SIGNAL ...................................................... 200 Electric Throttle Control
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
. 200 INDEX FOR DTC ..................................................... 236
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 201 Alphabetical Index ................................................ 236
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 202 DTC No. Index ...................................................... 237
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ............................................ 204 PRECAUTIONS ...................................................... 239
Description ........................................................... 204 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG”
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” ................... 239
. 204 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine .... 239
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 205 Precaution ............................................................ 239
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 206 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .............. 242
Component Inspection ......................................... 209 PREPARATION ....................................................... 243
Removal and Installation ...................................... 210 Special Service Tools ........................................... 243
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIR- Commercial Service Tools .................................... 244
CUIT .........................................................................211 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................ 245
System Diagram - QG13DE Engine Models ........ 245 EC
Component Description .........................................211
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode System Diagram - QG16DE and QG18DE Engine
..211 Models .................................................................. 246
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 212 Vacuum Hose Drawing ......................................... 247
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 213 System Chart ........................................................ 248
Component Inspection ......................................... 214 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System ................... 248
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ................. 215 Electronic Ignition (EI) System ............................. 250
Description ........................................................... 215 Air Conditioning Cut Control ................................. 251
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 216 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 217 Speed) .................................................................. 252
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 220 CAN Communication ............................................ 252
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE ............................. 255
. 220 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check .................. 255
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 221 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .... 256
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 222 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning ............... 256
Component Inspection ......................................... 226 Idle Air Volume Learning ...................................... 257
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ..................... 227 Fuel Pressure Check ............................................ 259
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 227 Injector .................................................................. 261
CO ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR .............................. 228 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM .......... 264
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 228 Introduction ........................................................... 264
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 229 Two Trip Detection Logic ...................................... 264
Description ........................................................... 229 Emission-related Diagnostic Information .............. 264
Component Inspection ......................................... 231 NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) ......................... 266
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 232 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ......................... 267
Description ........................................................... 232 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .......................................... 271
Component Inspection ......................................... 232 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ............................. 271
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 234 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................... 275
Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 234 Fail-safe Chart ...................................................... 276
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 234 Basic Inspection ................................................... 278
Mass Air Flow Sensor .......................................... 234 Symptom Matrix Chart .......................................... 284
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 234 Engine Control Component Parts Location .......... 288
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 234 Circuit Diagram ..................................................... 292
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 234 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout ........... 294
EGRC-Solenoid Valve (QG16DE and QG18DE ECM Terminals and Reference Value ................... 294
Engine Models) .................................................... 234 CONSULT-II Function ........................................... 301
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Valve ........ 234 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
IACV-AAC Valve ................................................... 234 . 311
Injector ................................................................. 235 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor
Ignition Coil with Power Transistor ....................... 235 Mode ..................................................................... 314
Condenser ............................................................ 235 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE. 316
Fuel Pump ............................................................ 235 Description ............................................................ 316
Testing Condition .................................................. 316
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 316
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 317
EC-3
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- Component Inspection .......................................... 357
DENT ....................................................................... 320 Removal and Installation ....................................... 358
Description ............................................................ 320 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................ 359
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 320 Component Description ........................................ 359
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM ................... 321 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 321 .359
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 322 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 359
Component Inspection .......................................... 326 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 359
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE. 327 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 361
Description ............................................................ 327 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 362
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 327 Remove and Installation ....................................... 364
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 328 DTC P0327, P0328 KS ............................................ 365
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 330 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 365
Component Description ........................................ 330 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 365
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 366
. 330 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 367
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 330 Removal and Installation ....................................... 368
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 332 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) .......................... 369
Component Inspection .......................................... 335 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 336 .369
Component Description ........................................ 336 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 369
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 336 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 369
Component Inspection .......................................... 340 Removal and Installation ....................................... 375
Removal and Installation ...................................... 340 DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ..................... 376
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 341 Component Description ........................................ 376
Component Description ........................................ 341 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 376
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 376
. 341 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 378
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 341 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 379
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 341 Component Inspection .......................................... 382
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 343 Removal and Installation ....................................... 382
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 344 DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL ............................... 383
Component Inspection .......................................... 346 Component Description ........................................ 383
Remove and Installation ....................................... 346 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 383
DTC P0132 HO2S1 ................................................. 347 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 383
Component Description ........................................ 347 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 384
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 389
. 347 Component Inspection .......................................... 393
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 347 Removal and Installation ....................................... 394
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 348 DTC P0500 VSS ...................................................... 395
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 349 Description ............................................................ 395
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 350 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 395
Component Inspection .......................................... 351 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 395
Removal and Installation ...................................... 352 Overall Function Check ......................................... 396
DTC P0134 HO2S1 ................................................. 353 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 396
Component Description ........................................ 353 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR ...................................... 397
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Description ........................................ 397
. 353 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Overall Function Check ........................................ 354 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 397
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 355 DTC Confirmation Procedure ................................ 397
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 356 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 398
EC-4
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 399 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Component Inspection ......................................... 400 . 433
DTC P0605 ECM .................................................... 401 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 434
Component Description ........................................ 401 Overall Function Check ........................................ 434
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 401 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 437
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 401 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 438
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 403 Main 12 Causes of Overheating ........................... 445
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY ....................... 404 Component Inspection .......................................... 446
Component Description ........................................ 404 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR ........................................ 447
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 404 Component Description ........................................ 447
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 404 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 447
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 405 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 447
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 406 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 448
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE .... 408 Remove and Installation ....................................... 448
Description ........................................................... 408 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR ........................................ 449
EC
. 408 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 449
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 409 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 449
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 409 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 450
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 410 Remove and Installation ....................................... 450
Diagnostic Procedure ............................................411 DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 451
Component Inspection ......................................... 412 On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 451
Removal and Installation ...................................... 412 DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 451
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 452
ACTUATOR ............................................................ 413 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 453
Component Description ........................................ 413 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................ 455
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 413 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 414 . 455
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 455
FUNCTION .............................................................. 415 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 457
Description ........................................................... 415 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 459
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 415 Component Inspection .......................................... 461
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 415 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ...................... 462
Wiring Diagram .................................................... 416 Component Description ........................................ 462
Component Inspection ......................................... 421 . 462
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR DTC confirmation Procedure ................................ 462
RELAY .................................................................... 422 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 464
Component Description ........................................ 422 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 465
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Component Inspection .......................................... 469
. 422 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ..... 470
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 425 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 471
Component Inspection ......................................... 427 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................. 472
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ........ 428 Description ............................................................ 472
Component Description ........................................ 428 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
On Board Diagnosis Logic ................................... 428 . 472
Component Inspection ......................................... 431 Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 474
Remove and Installation ....................................... 432 Component Inspection .......................................... 477
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ....... 433 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 479
System Description .............................................. 433 Component Description ........................................ 479
EC-5
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL
. 479 SOLENOID VALVE .................................................. 522
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 479 Description ............................................................ 522
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 479 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 481 .522
Component Inspection .......................................... 484 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 525
Remove and Installation ....................................... 485 Component Inspection .......................................... 528
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 486 Removal and Installation ....................................... 528
Component Description ........................................ 486 PNP SWITCH .......................................................... 529
. 486 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 489 INJECTOR CIRCUIT ............................................... 533
Component Inspection .......................................... 491 Component Description ........................................ 533
Remove and Installation ....................................... 492 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR ........................................ 493 .533
Component Description ........................................ 493 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 534
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 535
. 493 Component Inspection .......................................... 538
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 493 Removal and Installation ....................................... 538
DTC Confirmation Procedure ............................... 493 FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT ............................................. 539
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 495 Description ............................................................ 539
Component Inspection .......................................... 498 .539
Remove and Installation ....................................... 498 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 540
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR ..................................... 499 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 541
Component Description ........................................ 499 Component Inspection .......................................... 544
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode Removal and Installation ....................................... 545
. 499 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .................. 546
On Board Diagnosis Logic .................................... 499 Component Description ........................................ 546
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 502 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ................................ 551
Component Inspection .......................................... 504 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode
Remove and Installation ....................................... 505 .551
HO2S1 HEATER ..................................................... 506 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 552
Description ............................................................ 506 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 553
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .......................................... 558
. 506 Component Description ........................................ 558
Component Inspection .......................................... 510 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 559
Removal and Installation ...................................... 510 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 560
IAT SENSOR ........................................................... 511 Component Inspection .......................................... 564
Component Description ........................................ 511 ASCD INDICATOR .................................................. 565
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 512 Component Description ........................................ 565
Component Inspection .......................................... 514 .565
HO2S1 ..................................................................... 515 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 566
Component Description ........................................ 515 Diagnostic Procedure ............................................ 567
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR ...................... 568
. 515 Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 568
Wiring Diagram ..................................................... 516 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ..................... 570
Diagnostic Procedure ........................................... 517 Description ............................................................ 570
Component Inspection .......................................... 520 Component Inspection .......................................... 572
Removal and Installation ...................................... 521
EC-6
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ............... 573 Mass Air Flow Sensor ........................................... 577
Description ........................................................... 573 Intake Air Temperature Sensor ............................. 577
Component Inspection ......................................... 573 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor ................... 577
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD). 575 Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater ......................... 577
System Description .............................................. 575 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) ....................... 577
Component Description ........................................ 576 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) .................... 577
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 577 Throttle Control Motor ........................................... 577
Fuel Pressure ....................................................... 577 Injector .................................................................. 577
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing ............................. 577 Fuel Pump ............................................................ 578
EC
EC-7
APPLICATION NOTICE
APPLICATION NOTICE PFP:00000
How to Check Vehicle Type EBS00WT4
Check the application of the vehicle type.

Vehicle type Component location
Conventional throttle control
JEF091Y
Electric throttle control
PBIB1705E
EC-8
INDEX FOR DTC
[Conventional Throttle Control]
INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024
Alphabetical Index EBS00TNZ
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
Items DTC MIL lighting

Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) CONSULT-II ECM*1 up
A/T COMM LINE P0600 0600 1 — EC-135

CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 1 × EC-118
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 1 × EC-124
ECT SEN/CIRC P0115 0115 1 × EC-102
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 × EC-139
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P1320 1320 1 × EC-153
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0325 0325 1 — EC-114 EC
MAF SEN/CIRCUIT P0100 0100 1 × EC-96
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 1 — EC-30
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING No DTC Flashing*2 — Flashing*2 EC-31
MAY BE REQUIRED.
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
THRTLE POS SEN/CIRC P0120 0120 1 × EC-107
VEH SEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0500 1 × EC-130
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*2: When engine is running.
DTC No. Index EBS00TO0

DTC Items MIL lighting
Trip Reference page
CONSULT-II ECM *1 (CONSULT-II screen terms) up
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
No DTC Flashing*2 FURTHER TESTING — Flashing*2 EC-31
MAY BE REQUIRED.
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0100 0100 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-96
P0115 0115 ECT SEN/CIRC 1 × EC-102
P0120 0120 THRTL POS SEN/CIRC 1 × EC-107
P0325 0325 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 1 — EC-114
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-118
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 1 × EC-124
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC 1 × EC-130
P0600 0600 A/T COMM LINE 1 — EC-135
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP 1 × EC-139
P1320 1320 IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY 1 × EC-153
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION 1 — EC-30
EC-9
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER” EBS00TO1
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL N16 is as follows:
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering
wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), front seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connec-
tor.
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine EBS00TO2
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves,
etc. will cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to “HARNESS CONNECTOR”, EL-6.
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
EC-10
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions EBS00TO3
● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative
battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned off.
SEF706Y
● Do not disassemble ECM.

EC
● If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the cable is dis-
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
SEF707Y
● When connecting or disconnecting ECM harness connec-

tor, use lever as shown.
When connecting, fasten connector securely with lever
moved until it stops.
SEF908W
● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminals when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A Poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent an engine control SEF291H
system malfunctions due to receiving external noise,

degraded operation of ICs, etc.
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
EC-11
PRECAUTIONS
● Before replacing ECM, refer to “ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions prop-
erly, EC-65, "ECM Terminals and Reference Value".
● Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
● Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
● Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent.
● Do not disassemble IAC valve-AAC valve.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous incidents. MEF040D
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

and crankshaft position sensor (POS).
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC

Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
SAT652J
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never

allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
SEF348N
EC-12
PRECAUTIONS
● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
● Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
SEF605X
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
EC
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
1. Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
2. Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
3. Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave ratio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y
4. Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EBS00TO4
When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

● “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”, GI-11
● “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”, EL-10 for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
● “How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnoses”, GI-32
● “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSES FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, GI-21
EC-13
PREPARATION
PREPARATION PFP:00002
Special Service Tools EBS00Y9H
Tool number
Description
Tool name
EG17650301 Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap
Radiator cap tester adapter and radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564
Commercial Service Tools EBS00TO6
Tool name Description

Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve open-
ing pressure
S-NT653
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tem-

perature sensor
S-NT705
EC-14
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
System Diagram — QG13DE Engine Models EBS00TO7
EC
PBIB1865E
EC-15
System Diagram — QG16DE and QG18DE Engine Models EBS00TO8
PBIB1866E
EC-16
Vacuum Hose Drawing EBS00TOB
EC
PBIB1738E
Refer to EC-245, "System Diagram - QG13DE Engine Models" or EC-16, "System Diagram — QG16DE
and QG18DE Engine Models" for Vacuum Control System.
EC-17
System Chart EBS00TOC
Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)

● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Injectors
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic ignition system Power transistor
● Mass air flow sensor Idle air control system IACV-AAC valve
● Engine coolant temperature sensor
Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
● Ignition switch
On board diagnostic system MIL (On the instrument panel)
● Throttle position sensor
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch EGR control*1 EGRC solenoid valve
● Air conditioner switch EVAP canister purge volume con-
EVAP canister purge flow control
● Knock sensor trol solenoid valve
● Battery voltage Cooling fan control Cooling fan relay
● Power steering oil pressure switch
● Vehicle speed sensor
● Closed throttle position switch
Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay
● Electrical load
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
● TCM (Transmission control module)*2
*1: QG16DE and QG18DE engine models
*2: A/T models
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System EBS00TOD
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

ECM func-
Sensor Input Signal to ECM Actuator
tion
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Engine speed and piston position
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
Throttle position
Throttle position sensor
Throttle valve idle position
Fuel injec-
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Gear position
tion & mix-
Injector
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed ture ratio
control
Ignition switch Start signal
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Electrical load Electrical load signal
Battery Battery voltage
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering operation
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
● During warm-up
EC-18
● When starting the engine
● During acceleration
● Hot-engine operation
● When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)
● High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
● During deceleration
● During high engine speed operation
● Extremely high engine coolant temperature
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
EC
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System EBS00TOE

ECM func-
tion
Engine speed and piston position
Throttle position Ignition
Throttle valve idle position timing con- Power transistor
Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed trol

Knock sensor Engine knocking
EC-19
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-
fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition tim-
ing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and
camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition
signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the
ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
● At starting SEF742M
● During warm-up
● At idle
● At low battery voltage
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control EBS00TOF

ECM func-
tion
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle
Engine speed
Air condi-
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature tioner cut Air conditioner relay
Ignition switch Start signal control
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure

Vehicle speed sensor Vehicle speed
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering operation
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
● When cranking the engine.
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
● When engine speed is excessively low.
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
EC-20
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) EBS00TOG

ECM func-
tion
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Throttle position sensor Throttle position Fuel cut
Injectors
control
Engine speed
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 2,500 rpm with no load, (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 2,500
rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed. EC
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 2,000 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-18.
EC-21
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check EBS00TOI
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check the idle speed by installing the pulse type tachometer clamp on the loop wire or on suitable high-tension
wire which is installed between No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug.
NOTE:
For the method of installing the tachometer, refer to EC-22, "IGNITION TIMING".
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A
1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
2. Check ignition timing.
JEF150Y
Method B
1. Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
2. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this
wire.
SEF933W
EC-22
SEF166Y
EC
SEF284G
Idle Air Volume Learning EBS00TOJ
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time IACV-AAC valve, throttle body or ECM is replaced.
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
● Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 99°C (158 - 210°F)
● PNP switch: ON
● Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
● Vehicle speed: Stopped
● Transmission: Warmed-up
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/
T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
4. Check that all items listed under the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 28 seconds.
EC-23
7. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
SEF217Z
8. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
SEF454Y
9. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If

“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the inci-
dent by referring to the NOTE below.
10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed
and ignition timing are within specifications.
Engine and transmission Idle speed Ignition timing
type (in P or N position) (in P or N position)
M/T 630±50 rpm 2±2° BTDC
QG13DE
A/T 750±50 rpm 6±2° BTDC MBIB0238E
M/T 630±50 rpm 6±2° BTDC

QG16DE
A/T 750±50 rpm 6±2° BTDC
M/T 630±50 rpm 6±2° BTDC
QG18DE
A/T 700±50 rpm 6±2° BTDC
Without CONSULT-II
6. Start the engine and let it idle for at least 28 seconds.
EC-24
7. Disconnect throttle position sensor harness connector (brown),
then reconnect it within 5 seconds.
8. Wait 20 seconds.
9. Make sure that idle speed is within specifications. If not, the
result will be incomplete. In this case, find the cause of the inci-
dent by referring to the NOTE below.
10. Rev up the engine two or three times. Make sure that idle speed
and ignition timing are within specifications.
type (in P or N position) (in P or N position) JEF091Y
M/T 630±50 rpm 2±2° BTDC

QG13DE
A/T 750±50 rpm 6±2° BTDC
M/T 630±50 rpm 6±2° BTDC
QG16DE EC
A/T 750±50 rpm 6±2° BTDC
M/T 630±50 rpm 6±2° BTDC
QG18DE
A/T 700±50 rpm 6±2° BTDC
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
3. Adjust closed throttle position switch and reset memory. (Refer to EC-38, "Basic Inspection".)
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform “Idle air volume learning” all over again:
● Engine stalls.
● Erroneous idle.
● Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system.
Fuel Pressure Check EBS00TOK
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF.
SEF214Y
EC-25
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuse for fuel pump. Refer to fuse block cover for fuse
location.
2. Start engine.
pressure.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and reconnect fuel pump fuse.
JEF086Y
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
● Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
● Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
● Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
● Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear window
defogger, A/C etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads
and changes in manifold vacuum.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Disconnect fuel hose between fuel filter and fuel tube (engine side).
3. Install pressure gauge between fuel filter and fuel tube.
4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
At idle speed:
With vacuum hose Approximately 235 kPa
connected (2.35 bar, 2.4 kg/cm2, 34 psi)
With vacuum hose Approximately 294 kPa
disconnected (2.94 bar, 3.0 kg/cm2, 43 psi)
JEF087Y
6. If results are unsatisfactory, perform EC-26, "Fuel Pressure
Regulator Check".
Fuel Pressure Regulator Check EBS00TTP
1. Stop engine and disconnect fuel pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake manifold.
2. Plug intake manifold with a rubber cap.
3. Connect variable vacuum source to fuel pressure regulator.
4. Start engine and read indication of fuel pressure gauge as vac-
uum is changed.
Fuel pressure should decrease as vacuum increases. If results
are unsatisfactory, replace fuel pressure regulator.
SEF718B
Injector EBS00TOL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
EC-26
2. Remove fuel tube assemblies in numerical sequence as shown
in the Figure at left.
JEF088Y
3. Expand and remove clips securing fuel injectors.

4. Extract fuel injectors straight from fuel tubes.
● Be careful not to damage injector nozzles during EC
removal.
● Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
5. Install fuel injectors.

Carefully install O-rings, including the one used with the pres-
sure regulator.
● Lubricate O-rings with a smear of engine oil.
● Be careful not to damage O-rings with service tools fin- SEF927W
ger nails or clips. Do not expand or twist O-rings.

● Discard old clips; replace with new ones.
6. Position clips in grooves on fuel injectors.

● Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation.
JEF089Y
7. Align protrusions of fuel tubes with those of fuel injectors. Insert fuel injectors straight into fuel tubes.
8. After properly inserting fuel injectors, check to make sure that fuel tube protrusions are engaged with
those of fuel injectors, and that flanges of fuel tubes are engaged with clips.
EC-27
9. Tighten fuel tube assembly mounting nuts in numerical
sequence (indicated in the Figure at left) and in two stages.
: Tightning torque N·m (kg·m, ft·lb)

1st stage: 12 - 13 (1.2 - 1.4, 9 - 10)
2nd stage: 17 - 23 (1.7 - 2.4, 13 - 17)
10. Insert fuel hoses into fuel tubes so that ends of fuel hoses butt
up against fuel tubes; fasten with clamps, avoiding bulges.
CAUTION:
After properly connecting fuel tube assembly to injector and JEF815Y
fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage.
EC-28
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
Introduction EBS00TOM
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. Self-diagnosis items are listed in EC-9, "INDEX FOR DTC".
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when a specific malfunction is
detected, or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode (Refer to EC-38). For diagnostic items causing the MIL to
light up, refer to EC-9, "INDEX FOR DTC".
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) EBS00TTQ
HOW TO READ DTC

Malfunction items can be confirmed by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode.
Examples: P0100, P0115, P0335, etc. (CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) EC
Without CONSULT-II
The number of blinks of the malfunction indicator lamp in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)
indicates the DTC. Examples: 0100, 1320 etc.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, Mode II does not indicate whether the malfunc-
tion is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if avail-
able) is recommended.
SEF560X
A sample of CONSULT-II display is shown at above. The malfunction is displayed in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last
detection of a malfunction.
If the malfunction is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
FREEZE FRAME DATA
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position and
base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the DTC, are called freeze frame data. The data, stored
together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II. The freeze frame
data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. For details, see EC-74.
Only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM.
When more than one DTC is detected, the freeze frame data detected first is stored in the memory.
The freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased. Procedures for
clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-29, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION".
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
WITH CONSULT-II
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 9
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
EC-29
2. Turn CONSULT-II ON and touch “ENGINE”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
SEF993XA
The emission-related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
NO TOOLS
seconds and then turn it ON again.
6. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by using the data link connector. (See EC-32)
The emission-related diagnostic information can be erased by changing the diagnostic test mode from Diag-
nostic Test Mode II to Mode I by using the data link connector. (See EC-31)
NOTE:
● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within. 24
hours.
● Erasing the emission-related diagnostic information using CONSULT-II is easier and quicker than
switching the mode using the data link connector.
● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
– Diagnostic trouble codes
– Freeze frame data
– Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) EBS00TOP
● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

the ON position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed on
“SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) in “NATS (NIS-
SAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)”, EL-284.
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NATS is displayed
before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode
with CONSULT-II.
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and reg-
istration of all NATS ignition key IDs must be carried out SEF543X
with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
EC-30
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner. Regarding the procedure of NATS initial-
ization and NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual, NATS.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) EBS00TOQ
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to “WARNING LAMPS”, EL-
102, EC-227.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
EC
SAT652J
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
“ON” position open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit and ECM
test mode selector. (EC-32.)
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

WARNING detected, the MIL will light up to inform the driver that a
malfunction has been detected.
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs to be read.

“ON” position RESULTS
Engine stopped
MIL Flashing without DTC

If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM test
mode following “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES”.
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later. (See
EC-32)
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● Diagnostic trouble codes
● Freeze frame data
● Others
EC-31
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
PBIB1743E
*1: EC-227 *2: EC-31 *3: EC-227
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the MIL bulb. Refer to
“WARNING LAMPS”, EL-102 or see EC-227.
EC-32
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
● These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS).
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
In this mode, the DTC is indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
EC
PBIA3905E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second)-OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0 second OFF. In other words, the latter
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8 second off.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-9.)
How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
The DTC can be erased from the backup memory in the ECM when the diagnostic test mode is changed from
Diagnostic Test Mode II to Diagnostic Test Mode I. (Refer to EC-32.)
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within. 24 hours.
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
EC-33
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction EBS00TOR
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a incident that occurs intermit-
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
MEF036D
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road
test with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be per-
formed. Follow the “Work Flow” on EC-35.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example
on EC-37 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for conventional malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
cally controlled engine vehicle.
SEF233G
SEF234G
EC-34
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
Flow Chart
EC
SEF510ZC
*1: If time data of “SELF-DIAG *3: If the on board diagnostic system *5: EC-83
RESULTS” is other than “0” or “1t” cannot be performed, check main
refer to EC-87, "TROUBLE DIAG- power supply and ground circuit.
NOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- Refer to EC-88, "POWER SUPPLY
DENT". CIRCUIT FOR ECM".
*2: If the incident cannot be duplicated, *4: If the malfunctioning part cannot be
refer to EC-87, "TROUBLE DIAG- found, refer to EC-87, "TROUBLE
NOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI- DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT
DENT". INCIDENT".
EC-35
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Description for Work Flow
STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
STEP I
EC-36, "DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET"
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II) the Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) and the freeze frame data, then erase the code and the data. (Refer to EC-29) The DTC and the freeze frame
data can be used when duplicating the incident at STEP III & IV.
STEP II
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by DTC, and the symptom described by the customer. (The
Symptom Matrix Chart will be useful. See EC-56.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II
STEP III to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-87, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT"
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the Diagnostic Trouble Code by driving in (or performing) the DTC Confirmation Procedure. Check and
read the DTC and freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II.
During the DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode
and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-87, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT"
In case the DTC Confirmation Procedure is not available, perform the Overall Function Check instead. The DTC can-
not be displayed by this check, however, this simplified check is an effective alternative.
The NG result of the Overall Function Check is the same as the DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the EC-38, "Basic Inspection". If CONSULT-II is available, perform DATA
STEP V
MONITOR (SPEC) mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the EC-83, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". (If a malfunction is detected, proceed to “REPAIR/REPLACE”.) Then perform inspections according to the
EC-56, "Symptom Matrix Chart"
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the
system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) Harness Layouts.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG) mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II.
STEP VI
Refer to EC-65, EC-79.
The DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short cir-
cuit inspection is also required for the circuit check in the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE. For details, refer to “HOW TO
PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, GI-21, “Circuit Inspection”.
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and
circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint.
Perform the DTC Confirmation Procedure and confirm the normal code [Diagnostic trouble code No. P0000 or 0000]
STEP VII is detected. If the incident is still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a different method from the
previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) DTC in ECM. (Refer to
EC-29.)
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Example:
Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
SEF907L
EC-36
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Worksheet Sample
EC
MTBL0311
DTC Inspection Priority Chart EBS00TOS
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
EC-37
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 ● P0100 Mass air flow sensor
● P0115 Engine coolant temperature sensor
● P0120 Throttle position sensor
● P0325 Knock sensor
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
● P1320 Ignition signal
● P1610 - P1615 NATS
2 ● P1217 Overheat
3 ● P0600 A/T Communication Line
Fail-safe Chart EBS00TOT
The ECM enters fail-safe mode if any of the following malfunctions is detected due to the open or short circuit.
When the ECM enters the fail-safe mode, the MIL illuminates.
DTC No.
CONSULT- Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM*1
II
P0100 0100 Mass air flow sensor cir- Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
cuit
P0115 0115 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after
ture sensor circuit turning ignition switch ON or START.
CONSULT-II displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
The radiator fan operates.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or Start
More than approx. 4 minutes
80°C (176°F)
after ignition ON or Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
P0120 0120 Throttle position sensor Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the
circuit engine speed. Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
P1217 1217 Overheat Engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm due to the fuel cut.
*: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results)
Basic Inspection EBS00TOU
PREPARATION
● Make sure that the following parts are in good order.
– Battery
– Ignition system
– Engine oil and coolant levels
– Fuses
– ECM harness connector
– Vacuum hoses
– Air intake system
(Oil filler cap, oil level gauge, etc.)
EC-38
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
– Fuel pressure
– Engine compression
– EGR valve operation (QG16DE and QG18DE engine models)
– Throttle valve
– EVAP system
● On models equipped with air conditioner, checks should be carried out while the air conditioner is
OFF.
● When checking idle speed, ignition timing and mixture ratio of A/T models, shift lever to P or N
position.
● When measuring CO percentage, insert probe more than 40 cm (15.7 in) into tail pipe.
● Turn off headlamps, heater blower, rear window defogger.
● Keep front wheels pointed straight ahead.
● If engine stops immediately after starting or idle condition is unstable, perform the following to ini-
EC
tialize IACV-AAC valve:
– Stop engine and wait 9 seconds.
– Turn ignition ON and wait 1 second.
– Turn ignition OFF and wait 9 seconds.
● Make sure after the cooling fan has stopped.
BASIC INSPECTION
Precaution:
Perform Basic Inspection without electrical or mechanical loads applied;
● Headlamp switch is OFF,
● Air conditioner switch is OFF,
● Rear window defogger switch is OFF,
● Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
● Harness connectors for improper connections
● Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
● Wiring for improper connections, pinches and cuts
● Air cleaner clogging
● Hoses and ducts for leaks
>> GO TO 2.
SEF983U
EC-39
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK THROTTLE DRUM OPERATION
Confirm that throttle drum moves to contact the stopper.
OK or NG
OK (A/T models with CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 5.
OK (A/T models without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 9.
OK (M/T models with CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 13.
OK (M/T models without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 16.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SEF154Y
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR WIRE

Check accelerator wire for slack.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Adjust accelerator wire. Refer to “Adjusting Accelerator Wire”, FE-4.
4. CHECK THROTTLE VALVE OPERATION

1. Remove intake air ducts.
2. Check throttle valve operation when moving throttle drum by hand.
OK or NG
OK >> 1. Retighten the throttle drum fixing nuts.
2. GO TO 2.
NG >> 1. Clean the throttle body and throttle valve.
2. GO TO 2.
EC-40
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION
With CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Always check ignition timing before performing the following.
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Select “A/T” and then select “CLSD THL/SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Read “CLSD THL/SW” signal under the following conditions.
● Insert a 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler
gauge alternately between stopper and throttle drum as shown
in the figure and check the signal.
EC
SEF158Y
SEF173Y
“CLSD THL/SW” signal should remain “ON” while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
“CLSD THL/SW” signal should remain “OFF” while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-41
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
6. ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I
With CONSULT-II
1. Loosen throttle position sensor fixing bolts.
2. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and
throttle drum as shown in the figure.
SEF158Y
3. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until “CLSD

THL/SW” signal switches to “OFF”.
SEF964W
SEF173Y
>> GO TO 7.
EC-42
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
7. ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II
With CONSULT-II
1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
– Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it
when “CLSD THL/SW” signal switches from “OFF” to “ON”,
then temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts.
EC
SEF964W
2. Make sure two or three times that the signal is “ON” when the throttle valve is closed and “OFF” when it is
opened.
3. Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
4. Make sure two or three times that the signal remains “OFF” when the throttle valve is closed.
5. Tighten throttle position sensor.
6. Check the “CLSD THL/SW” signal again.
The signal remains “OFF” while closing throttle valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-43
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
8. RESET THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION MEMORY
With CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Always warm up engine to normal operating temperature. If engine is cool, the throttle position sensor
idle position memory will not be reset correctly.
1. Remove feeler gauge.
2. Start engine.
3. Warm up engine to normal operating temperature.
4. Select “ENGINE” and then select CLSD THL POS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
5. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.)
6. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF864V
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until “CLSD THL POS” signal changes to

“ON”.
>> GO TO 13.
SEF061Y
EC-44
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
9. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
Always check ignition timing before performing the following.
2. Stop engine and wait at least 9 seconds.
3. Disconnect closed throttle position switch harness connector.
4. Check continuity between closed throttle position switch termi-
nals 4 and 5 under the following conditions.
EC
SEF711X
● Insert the 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) and 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler
gauge alternately between the stopper and throttle drum as
shown in the figure.
SEF158Y
Continuity should exist while inserting 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge.
Continuity should not exist while inserting 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.
EC-45
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
10. ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-I
Without CONSULT-II
2. Insert 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge between stopper and
throttle drum as shown in the figure.
SEF158Y
SEF711X
3. Turn throttle position sensor body counterclockwise until conti-

nuity does not exist.
SEF964W
>> GO TO 11.
EC-46
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
11. ADJUSTMENT THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CLOSED POSITION-II
Without CONSULT-II
1. Temporarily tighten sensor body fixing bolts as follows.
– Gradually move the sensor body clockwise and stop it
when the continuity comes to exist, then temporarily
tighten sensor body fixing bolts.
SEF964W
EC
2. Make sure two or three times that the continuity exists when the throttle valve is closed and continuity
does not exist when it is opened.
3. Remove 0.05 mm (0.0020 in) feeler gauge then insert 0.15 mm (0.0059 in) feeler gauge.
4. Make sure two or three times that the continuity does not exist when the throttle valve is closed.
6. Check the continuity again.
Continuity does not exist while closing the throttle valve.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 10.

Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
1. Remove feeler gauge.
2. Reconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
3. Start engine.
5. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch OFF.)
SEF864V

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7, 20 times.
>> GO TO 16.
EC-47
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
13. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION
With CONSULT-II
1. Select “THRTL POS SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Check that output voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” is 0.15 to
0.85V, and “CLSD THL POS” stays “ON”. (Accelerator pedal
fully released.)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 14.
SEC353C
14. ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION

With CONSULT-II
1. Loosen throttle position sensor fIxing bolts.
2. Turn throttle position sensor body clockwise or counter clock-
wise until “THRTL POS SEN” voltage becomes 0.15 - 0.85V.
>> GO TO 15.
SEC203D
EC-48
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT-II
NOTE:
1. Start engine.
3. Select “ENGINE” and then select CLSD THL POS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
4. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch “OFF”.)
EC
SEF864V
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until “CLSD THL POS” signal changes to

“ON”.
>> GO TO 19.
SEF061Y
16. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION

Without CONSULT-II
2. Connect throttle position sensor harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON and accelerator pedal fully released.
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 57 and engine ground.
Voltage: 0.15 - 0.85V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19
NG >> GO TO 17.
SEC204D
EC-49
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
17. ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR IDLE POSITION
Without CONSULT-II
2. Turn throttle position sensor body clockwise or counterclockwise
until voltage between ECM terminal 57 and ground becomes
0.15 - 0.85V.
>> GO TO 18.
SEC203D

Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
1. Start engine.
3. Stop engine. (Turn ignition switch OFF.)
SEF864V

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5, 20 times.
>> GO TO 19.
19. CHECK DTC

2. Release vacuum from throttle opener.
3. Remove vacuum pump and vacuum hose from throttle opener.
4. Reinstall original vacuum hose to throttle opener securely.
6. Rev (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times.
7. Make sure on DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 21.
NG >> GO TO 20.
EC-50
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
20. REPAIR MALFUNCTION
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 19.
21. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “ENG SPEED” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check idle speed.
M/T models: 630±50 rpm
EC
A/T models with QG18DE: 700±50 rpm (in P or N position)
A/T models except above: 750±50 rpm (in P or N position)
Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 31.
NG >> GO TO 22
22. PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING

Refer to EC-23, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 23.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Leaning.
2. GO TO 22.
EC-51
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
23. CHECK TARGET IDLE SPEED AGAIN
With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 29.
NG >> GO TO 24.
24. CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check IACV-AAC valve circuit for open and short. Refer to EC-178.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 25.
NG >> 1. Repair or replace.
2. GO TO 26.
25. REPLACE IACV-ACC VALVE

Replace IACV-ACC valve.
>> GO TO 26.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 27.
2. GO TO 22.
EC-52
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check idle speed. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 29.
NG >> GO TO 28.
28. CHECK ECM FUNCTION

1. Substitute another known-good ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of an incident, but
this is rarely the case.)
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-30, "NATS
(Nissan Anti-theft System)".
>> GO TO 22.
29. CHECK IGNITION TIMING

2. Check ignition timing at idle using a timing light.
Ignition timing:
M/T models with QG13DE: 2±2° BTDC
Except above: 6±2° BTDC (in P or N position)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 37.
NG >> GO TO 30.
SEF984U
30. CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION

Check timing chain installation. Refer to “TIMING CHAIN”, EM-23.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 28.
NG >> 1. Repair the timing chain installation.
2. GO TO 22.
EC-53
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Ignition timing:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 37.
NG >> GO TO 32.
SEF984U

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 33.
2. GO TO 32.

With CONSULT-II
Without CONSULT-II
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 35.
NG >> GO TO 34.

this is rarely the case.)
>> GO TO 32.
EC-54
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Ignition timing:
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 37.
NG >> GO TO 36.
SEF984U
EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 34.
2. GO TO 32.
37. CHECK IDLE CO%

Check the CO% by inserting a CO meter sampling probe into the tail pipe.
CO%: 2±1%
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 40.
NG >> GO TO 38.
38. ADJUST IDLE CO%

Removing the rubber cap of the CO adjustment resistor, rotate the adjuster with the triangle-shape head that
appears in the hole.
Create a tool for rotating the adjuster by processing rubber tube or other materials to match the shape of the
adjuster head.
SEF093Y
CO%: 2±1%
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 40.
NG >> GO TO 39.
EC-55
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
39. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following.
1. Check fuel pressure regulator. Refer to EC-26.
2. Check mass air flow sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-96.
3. Check injector and its circuit. Refer to EC-195.
Clean or replace if necessary.
4. Check engine coolant temperature sensor and its circuit. Refer to EC-102.
5. Check ECM function by substituting another known-good ECM.
(ECM may be the cause of a problem, but this is rarely the case.)
>> GO TO 37
40. ERASE UNNECESSARY DTC

After this inspection, unnecessary DTC No. might be displayed.
Erase the stored memory in ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
Refer to EC-29 and “HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS”, AT-43.
>> INSPECTION END

Symptom Matrix Chart EBS00TOV
SYSTEM — ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SYMPTOM
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
ENGINE STALL
HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

Reference
page
Warranty symptom code A A A A

AC AD AF AG AH AJ AL AM HA
A B E K
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-204
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-26
Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-195
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-229
Air Positive crankcase ventilation
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-232
system
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-22
IACV-AAC valve circuit 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-178
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjust-
3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-22
ment
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-153
EC-56
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
ENGINE STALL
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION

Reference
page
EC
Warranty symptom code A A A A

AC AD AF AG AH AJ AL AM HA
A B E K
EGR EGRC-solenoid valve circuit 2 2 3 3 3 EC-164
QG16DE
and EGR system 2 1 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 EC-164
QG18DE)
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 EC-88
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 HA section
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on next page)
SYMPTOM
ENGINE STALL
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION

Refer-
ence
page
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-118
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-124
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-96
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 2 EC-102
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-107
Incorrect throttle position sensor adjust-
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-38
ment
Vehicle speed sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-130
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-114
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-38
EC-57
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
ENGINE STALL
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION

Refer-
ence
page

Start signal circuit 2 EC-200
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-191
Power steering oil pressure switch circuit 2 3 3 EC-211
Electrical load signal circuit 3 3 EC-220
EC-58
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
SYMPTOM
ENGINE STALL
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION

Reference
page
EC
Warranty symptom code A A A A A A A A A H

AF AJ AL
A B C D E G H K M A
Fuel Fuel tank FE section
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5
Vapor lock
5
Valve deposit
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Low octane)
—
Air Air duct
Air cleaner
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — throttle
5 5 5 5 5 5
body)
5 5 5 5
Throttle body, Throttle wire FE section
Air leakage from intake manifold/
—
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Alternator circuit SC section
Starter circuit 3
Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM section
PNP switch 4 AT section
EC-59
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM
ENGINE STALL
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
IDLING VIBRATION

Reference
page
Warranty symptom code A A A A A A A A A H

AF AJ AL
A B C D E G H K M A
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
EM section
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve Timing chain
mecha-
Camshaft
nism 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM section
Intake valve
3
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 FE section
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil fil- MA, EM and
tion ter/Oil gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LC sections
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
Thermostat 5 LC section
Water pump
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Cooling fan 5 EC-139

Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
MA section
coolant
EC-60
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location EBS00TOW
EC
PBIB1735E
EC-61
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB1736E
EC-62
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
JEF079Y
EC-63
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram EBS00TOX
GEC440A
EC-64
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout EBS00TOY
SEF152Y
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00TOZ
PREPARATION
EC
1. The ECM is located on the passenger side in the cowl panel
(behind the strut tower), remove it from the engine room side.
● Remove the bracket fixing ECM harness.
SEF553Y
● Remove the quick connector of the ventilation hose in the ECM

compartment room by pressing in the direction of the arrow.
JEF096Y
● Pull the ECM box out of the dash panel by removing the two
ECM box attaching bolts.
● Remove the five bolts on ECM box installation cover.
: 3.9 - 6.9 N-m (0.39 - 0.71 kg-m, 34 - 61 in-lb)
● Remove the three ECM installation bolts.

: 4.1 - 6.8 N-m (0.41 - 0.70 kg-m, 36 - 60 in-lb)
SEF097Y
EC-65
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. Remove ECM harness protector.
SEF098Y
● When connecting or disconnecting ECM harness connec-

tor, use lever as shown.
When connecting, fasten connector securely with lever
moved until it stops.
SEF908W
3. Perform all voltage measurements with the connector con-

nected. Extend tester probe as shown to perform tests easily.
● Open harness securing clip to make testing easier.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
MEC486B
ECM INSPECTION TABLE

Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may result in dam-
age to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC-66
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
WIRE
MINAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition
● Idle speed
1 R/B Injector No. 1

SEF011W
2 Y/B Injector No. 2
3 G/B Injector No. 3 BATTERY VOLTAGE
4 L/B Injector No. 4 (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running] EC
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
SEF012W
5 - 10V
[Engine is running]
EVAP canister purge ● Warm-up condition
5 P volume control valve ● Lift up drive wheels and shift to a suitable gear
(ON/OFF duty) position other than P or N
● Accelerator pedal depressed
SEF975W
10 - 11V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
SEF973W
Tachometer
8 L/OR
(Four-thread type) 10 - 11V
[Engine is running]
SEF974W
EC-67
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
9 BR Ignition signal (No. 1)

SEF971W
10 PU Ignition signal (No. 2)
11 L/Y Ignition signal (No. 3) 0.2 - 0.4V
12 GY/R Ignition signal (No. 4)
[Engine is running]
SEF972W
[Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE

● Cooling fan is not operating (11 - 14V)
13 LG/B Cooling fan relay (High)
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Cooling fan is operating
14 LG/R Cooling fan relay (Low)
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Cooling fan is operating at low speed
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch OFF] 0 - 1V
ECM relay (Self shut- ● For 9 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
15 W/G
off) [Ignition switch OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● 9 seconds passed after turning ignition switch (11 - 14V)
OFF
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON
16 L Air conditioner relay
● A/C switch is OFF (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch ON]

● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1V
17 [Engine is running]
B/P Fuel pump relay
(20)* [Ignition switch ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch (11 - 14V)
ON
[Engine is running]
18 Y/B A/T signal No. 3 0.05 - 0.7V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
19 BR/W A/T signal No. 5 Approximately 8V
● Idle speed
[Ignition switch ON] 0 - 1V
Malfunction indicator
21 OR/L [Engine is running] BATTERY VOLTAGE
lamp
● Idle speed (11 - 14V)
EC-68
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Both air conditioner switch and blower switch Approximately 0V
28 L/R Air conditioner switch are ON (Compressor operates)
[Engine is running]
Approximately 5V
● Air conditioner switch is OFF
● Gear position is Neutral position (M/T models) Approximately 0V
29 G/OR PNP switch ● Gear position is N or P (A/T models)
Approximately 5V
● Except the above gear position
[Engine is running]
EC
Approximately 0V
Power steering oil pres- ● Steering wheel is fully turned
30 PU/W
sure switch [Engine is running]
Approximately 5V
● Steering wheel is not turned
[Ignition switch OFF] 0V
31 B/R Ignition switch BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
32 G/W Reverse switch
● Gear position is R (A/T models only) (11 - 14V)
B ECM ground Engine ground
35 ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
38 W/PU EGRC-solenoid valve [Vehicle is running]
0 - 1V
● Vehicle speed is more than 24 km/h (15 MPH)
● Revving engine up from 2,000 to 3,000 rpm
[Ignition switch ON] Approximately 0V
42 B/Y Start signal
[Ignition switch START] 9 - 12V
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Throttle position switch (11 - 14V)
43 Y/PU ● Accelerator pedal fully released
(Closed position)
Approximately 0V
[Engine is running]
45 Y/R A/T signal No. 1 0.05 - 0.7V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
46 Y/G A/T signal No. 2 0.05 - 0.7V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
47 G/Y A/T signal No. 4 0.05 - 0.7V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
48 B Sensors' ground ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
EC-69
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
2.0 - 3.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
SEF977W
50 Camshaft position sen-
R
(52)* sor (PHASE) 2.0 - 3.0V
[Engine is running]
SEF978W
3.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
SEF979W
51 Crankshaft position sen-
R
(49)* sor (POS) 3.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
SEF980W
Approximately 0 - 4.8V
Engine coolant temper-
54 BR/Y [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with
ature sensor
engine coolant temperature
[Engine is running]
Mass air flow sensor
56 B ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
ground
● Idle speed
0.15 - 0.85V
● Accelerator pedal released
57 Y Throttle position sensor
3.5 - 4.7V
● Accelerator pedal fully depressed
[Engine is running]
● Air conditioner switch is ON 1.0 - 4.0V
(Compressor operates)
Refrigerant pressure
58 R/L [Engine is running]
sensor
Voltage is decreasing gradually
● Idle speed
● Air conditioner switch is turned from ON to OFF.
EC-70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition 1.0 - 1.7V
● Idle speed
60 G Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
[Engine is running]
62 W Knock sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
● Idle speed
Data link connector for [Engine is running]

63 LG Approximately 9V
CONSULT-II ● Idle speed (CONSULT-II is disconnected)
EC
Electrical load signal-1 ● Headlamp switch or rear defogger switch is ON (11 - 14V)
67 R/W (Headlamp and [Engine is running]
Rear defogger) Approximately 0V
● Headlamp switch and rear defogger switch are
OFF
Approximately 0V
Electrical load signal-2 ● Blower fan switch is ON
68 LG/B
(Blower fan SW) [Ignition switch ON]
Approximately 5V
● Blower fan switch is OFF
Power supply for ECM BATTERY VOLTAGE
69 W/L [Ignition switch OFF]
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
101 BR [Engine is running]
102 LG
IACV-AAC valve ● Warm-up condition 0.1 - 14V
103 P
104 OR ● Idle speed

B/Y ECM ground Engine ground
106 ● Idle speed
107 BATTERY VOLTAGE
W Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch ON]
108 (11 - 14V)
109 R Sensors' power supply [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5V
2.5 - 3V
[Engine is running]
● Lift up the vehicle
110 PU/R Vehicle speed sensor
● In 2nd gear position
● Vehicle speed is 40 km/h (25 MPH)
SEF976W
*: Models for the Middle East
CONSULT-II Function EBS00TP0
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results Self-diagnostic results such as DTCs and freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Data monitor (spec) Specification with basic fuel schedule, MAS A/F sensor and A/F alpha can be read.
EC-71
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
ECM part number ECM part numbers can be read.
*1 The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● Others
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS
Item WORK DATA MONI- ACTIVE
SUPPORT FREEZE TOR TEST
DTC FRAME
DATA
Camshaft position (PHASE) sensor X X
Mass air flow sensor X X
Engine coolant temperature sensor X X X X
Vehicle speed sensor X X X
Throttle position sensor X X X
(Engine
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) X speed) X
X
Knock sensor X
INPUT
Ignition switch (start signal) X
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Closed throttle position switch X

Closed throttle position switch (throttle
X
position sensor signal)
Air conditioner switch X
Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch X
Power steering oil pressure switch X
Electrical load X
Battery voltage X
Injectors X X
X
Power transistor (Ignition timing) (Ignition sig- X X
nal)
IACV-AAC valve X X
EVAP canister purge volume control
X X
OUTPUT solenoid valve
Air conditioner relay X
Fuel pump relay X X X
EGRC-solenoid valve X X
Cooling fan X X X
Calculated load value X X
X: Applicable
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE

EC-72
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to data link connector.
(Data link connector is located under lower dash panel near the
fuse box cover.)
SEF094Y
4. Touch “START”.
EC
PBR455D
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
SEF995X
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure.
For further information, see the GI-36, regarding CONSULT-II.
SEF838Z
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE
● FOLLOW THE BASIC INSPECTION INSTRUCTION IN When adjusting the idle throttle
TP SW/TP SEN IDLE POSI ADJ
THE SERVICE MANUAL. position
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure from
ING IDLING. fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
EC-73
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clear the coefficient of self-
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- learning control value
FICIENT.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGNITION TIMING ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC, refer to EC-9, "INDEX FOR DTC".)
Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
Description
item
DIAG TROUBLE
● Engine Control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to EC-
CODE
9, "INDEX FOR DTC".)
[PXXXX]
● The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel sched-
ule.
● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED [km/
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
h] or [mph]
ABSOL TH·P/S
● The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[degree] or [%]
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item
×: Applicable
ECM
Main
input
Monitored item [Unit] sig- Description Remarks
sig-
nals
nals
● Accuracy becomes poor if engine
● Indicates the engine speed computed from the speed drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × signals of the crankshaft position sensor ● If the signal is interrupted while the
(POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
MAS A/F SE-B1 [V] × ×
is displayed. value is indicated.
EC-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM
Main
input
sig-
nals
nals
● When the engine coolant temperature
● The engine coolant temperature (determined sensor is open or short-circuited,
COOLAN TEMP/S
× × by the signal voltage of the engine coolant ECM enters fail-safe mode. The
[°C] or [°F]
temperature sensor) is displayed. engine coolant temperature deter-
mined by the ECM is displayed.
VHCL SPEED SE ● The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
× ×
[km/h] or [mph] speed sensor signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT [V] × ● The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
● The throttle position sensor signal voltage is
THRTL POS SEN [V] × ×
displayed.
● After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis- EC
START SIGNAL ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the starter
× × played regardless of the starter sig-
[ON/OFF] signal.
nal.
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by
CLSD THL POS
× × ECM according to the throttle position sensor
[ON/OFF]
signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condi-
AIR COND SIG [ON/
× × tioner switch as determined by the air condi-
OFF]
tioning signal.
P/N POSI SW [ON/ ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the PNP
× ×
OFF] switch signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the power
PW/ST SIGNAL [ON/
× × steering oil pressure switch determined by the
OFF]
power steering oil pressure switch signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electri-
cal load signal and/or lighting switch.
LOAD SIGNAL [ON/ ON ... rear defogger is operating and/or light-
× ×
OFF] ing switch is on.
OFF ... rear defogger is not operating and
lighting switch is not on.
IGNITION SW [ON/ ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition
×
OFF] switch.
HEATER FAN ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater
×
SW[ON/OFF] fan switch.
● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width
INJ PULSE-B1 ● When the engine is stopped, a certain
× compensated by ECM according to the input
[msec] computed value is indicated.
signals.
● Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM
IGN TIMING [BTDC] ×
according to the input signals.
● When the engine is stopped, a certain
● Indicates the mean value of the air-fuel ratio value is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] ×
feedback correction factor per cycle. ● This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
● Indicates the IACV-AAC valve control value
IACV-AAC/V [step] × computed by ECM according to the input sig-
nals.
● Indicates the air conditioner relay control con-
AIR COND RLY [ON/
× dition determined by ECM according to the
OFF]
input signals.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the EGRC-
EGRC SOL/V [ON/
× solenoid valve.
OFF]
● ON: EGR valve operating
EC-75
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM
Main
input
sig-
nals
nals
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition
FUEL PUMP RLY
× determined by ECM according to the input sig-
[ON/OFF]
nals.
● Indicates the control condition of the cooling
fan determined by ECM according to the input
COOLING FAN [HI/ signals.
×
LOW/OFF] HI ... High speed operation
LOW ... Low speed operation
OFF ... Stop
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injec-
B/FUEL SCHDL
tion pulse width programmed into ECM, prior
[msec]
to any learned on board correction.
● “Calculated load value” indicates the value of This function is not necessary in the
CAL/LD VALUE [%]
the current airflow divided by peak airflow. usual service procedure.
● “Absolute throttle position sensor” indicates
ABSOL TH.P/S deg the throttle opening computed by ECM accord-
or [%] ing to the signal voltage of the throttle position
sensor.
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve computed by the ECM
PURG VOL C/V [%] according to the input signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the value
increases.
● Display the condition of idle air volume learn-
ing
YET ... Idle air volume learning has not been
performed yet.
IDL A/V LEAN
CMPLT ... Idle air volume learning has already
been performed successfully.
INCMP ... Idle air volume learning has not
been performed successfully.
VOLTAGE [V] ● Voltage measured by the voltage probe.
● Only “#” is displayed if item is unable
to be measured.
PULSE [msec] or ● Pulse width, frequency or duty cycle measured ● Figures with “#”s are temporary ones.
[Hz] or [%] by the pulse probe. They are the same figures as an
actual piece of data which was just
previously measured.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE

Monitored Item
ECM
Main
input
sig-
nals
nals
● Indicates the engine speed computed from the speed drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × signals of the crankshaft position sensor ● If the signal is interrupted while the
(POS) and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor ● When the engine is running, specifi-
specification is displayed. cation range is indicated.
EC-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM
Main
input
sig-
nals
nals
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injec-
B/FUEL SCHDL ● When the engine is running, specifi-
tion pulse width programmed into ECM, prior
[msec] cation range is indicated.
to any learned on board correction.
● When the engine is running, specifi-
● Indicates the mean value of the air-fuel ratio cation range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%]* ×
feedback correction factor per cycle. ● This data also includes the data for
the air-fuel ratio learning control.
*: With three way catalyst only.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
EC
ACTIVE TEST MODE
Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGEMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connector

FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Fuel injectors
TION ● Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM. ● Front heated oxygen sensor
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Fuel pressure
● Refer to EC-23, "Idle Air Volume
● Engine: Return to the original Learning".
trouble condition ● Camshaft position sensor
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see (PHASE)
● Timing light: Set
ING CHECK ITEM.
● Retard the ignition timing using ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
CONSULT-II. ● Engine component parts and
installing conditions
● Engine: After warming up, idle the
IACV-AAC/V engine. Engine speed changes according to ● Harness and connector
OPENING ● Change the IACV-AAC valve the opening steps. ● IACV-AAC valve
opening steps using CONSULT-II.
● Engine: After warming up, idle the ● Harness and connector

engine. ● Compression
POWER BAL- ● Air conditioner switch OFF ● Injectors
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE ● Shift lever N or P ● Power transistor
● Cut off each injector signal one at ● Spark plugs
a time using CONSULT-II. ● Ignition coils
● Ignition switch: ON
● Harness and connector
COOLING FAN* ● Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “LOW” Cooling fan moves and stops.
● Cooling fan motor
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II.
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connector
trouble condition
ENG COOLANT If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature indication using CON-
SULT-II. ● Fuel injectors
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine

stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- ● Harness and connector
RELAY ● Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” ing sound. ● Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.
EC-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
● Engine: After warming up, idle the ● Harness and connector

EGRC SOLE- engine. Engine speed changes according to ● Vacuum hose
NOID VALVE ● Change the EGRC-solenoid the opening. ● EGR valve
valve opening using CONSULT-II. ● EGRC-solenoid valve
SELF-LEARN- ● In this test, the coefficient of self-learning control mixture ratio returns to the original coefficient by touching
ING CONT “CLEAR” on the screen.
● Engine: After warming up, idle the
engine.
● Harness and connector
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to
CONT/V the opening percent. ● EVAP canister purge volume con-
volume control solenoid valve
trol solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
IDLE AIR VOL
● In this test, the idle air volume that keeps the engine within the specified range is memorized in ECM.
LEARN
*: Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)

Description
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
In other words, DTC and malfunction item will be displayed if
the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI-
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording
Data ... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the mal-
function detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data ...
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
SEF705Y
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MAN-
UAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
● DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed automatically
on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunction is detected
by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
SEF707X
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC by performing the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, be sure to select to
“DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo-
nents and harness in the “DTC Confirmation Procedure”, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC
will be displayed. (Refer to “Incident Simulation Tests” in “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAG-
NOSES FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, GI-21.)
2. “MANU TRIG”
EC-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
EC
PBIB0197E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TP1
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
MONITOR ITEM CONDITION SPECIFICATION
● Run engine and compare CONSULT-II value with the tachometer indica- Almost the same speed as the
ENG SPEED
tion. tachometer indication.
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approx. 1.0 - 1.7V
● Air conditioner switch: OFF
MAS A/F SE-B1 ● Shift lever:

N (A/T models) 2,500 rpm Approx. 1.5 - 2.1V
Neutral (M/T models)
● No-load
COOLAN TEMP/S ● Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VEH SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication.
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
● Engine: After warming up, idle
Throttle valve fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
the engine
THRTL POS SEN ● Engine: After warming up
● Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
(Engine stopped)
EC-79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
START SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON
CLSD THL POS ● Ignition switch: ON
Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Shift lever: P or N (A/T models)
ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON Neutral (M/T models)
Shift lever: Except above OFF
Steering wheel is in neutral position.
● Engine: After warming up, idle OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (Forward direction)
the engine
Steering wheel is turned. ON
IGNITION SW ● Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
● Engine: After warming up Idle 2.4 - 3.7 msec
● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
INJ PULSE-B1 Neutral (M/T models) 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 3.2 msec
● No-load
Rear window defogger switch is ON
ON
and/or lighting switch is in 2nd.
LOAD SIGNAL ● Ignition switch: ON
Rear window defogger switch is OFF
OFF
and lighting switch is OFF.
● Engine: After warming up, idle Heater fan is operating. ON

HEATER FAN SW
the engine Heater fan is not operating OFF
● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
B/FUEL SCHDL Neutral (M/T models) 2,000 rpm 1.5 - 2.7 msec
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up QG13DE M/T: 2°±5° BTDC
Idle
● Shift lever: Except above: 6°±5° BTDC
N (A/T models)
IGN TIMING Neutral (M/T models)
2,000 rpm —
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 5 - 30 steps
● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
IACV-AAC/V Neutral (M/T models) 2,000 rpm —
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0%
● Shift lever:
N (A/T models) More than 30 seconds after starting
PURG VOL C/V Neutral (M/T models) engine
30 - 100%
Rev engine up from 2,000 to 4,000
rpm.
● No-load
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000
A/F ALPHA-B1 ● Engine: After warming up 75% - 125%
rpm
EC-80
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
Engine coolant temperature is 94°C
OFF
(201°F) or less
● After warming up engine, idle Engine coolant temperature is
COOLING FAN the engine. between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C LOW
● Air conditioner switch: OFF (219°F)
HIGH
(221°F) or more
Idle OFF
EGRC SOL/V ● Engine: After warming up
(QG16DE and Revving engine up from 2,000 to
● Lift up drive wheels and shift to a
QG18DE) suitable gear position.
3,000 rpm [More than 24 km/h (15 ON EC
MPH)]
● Engine: After warming up Idle 15.0 - 35.0%
● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
CAL/LD VALUE* Neutral (M/T models) 2,500 rpm 13.0 - 30.0%
● No-load
● Engine: Idle
Throttle valve fully closed 0.0%
● After warming up
ABSOL TH·P/S
Throttle valve fully opened Approx. 80%
(Engine stopped)
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TP2
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
THRTL POS SEN, ABSOL TH·P/S, CLSD THL POS
Below is the data for “THRTL POS SEN”, “ABSOL TH·P/S” and “CLSD THL POS” when depressing the accel-
erator pedal with the ignition switch ON.
The signal of “THRTL POS SEN” and “ABSOL TH·P/S” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or
rise after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from “ON” to “OFF”.
SEF240YA
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL POS SEN, INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL POS SEN” and “INJ PULSE-B1” when rev-
ving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
EC-81
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
SEF241Y
SEC628C
EC-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031
Description EBS00TP3
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI-
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MI.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor) EC
Testing Condition EBS00TP4
● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)

● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Transmission: Warmed-up*1
● Electrical load: Not applied*2
● Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T models , after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
For M/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
Inspection Procedure EBS00TP5
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-278, "Basic Inspection".
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-
B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
5. If NG, go to EC-84, "Diagnostic Procedure".
SEF601Z
EC-83
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TP6
SEF613ZD
EC-84
EC
SEF768Z
EC-85
SEF615ZA
EC-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
Description EBS00TP7
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
complaint often do not recur on DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occurrences is poor
electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may not be clear.
Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the specific mal-
functioning area.
Common I/I Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow Situation
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than “0”.
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure. EC
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TP8
1. INSPECTION START
Erase DTCs. Refer to EC-265, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSES FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCEDENT”, GI-21, “Inci-
dent Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair or replace.
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT

Perform “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSES FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, GI-21, “Incident
Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END
EC-87
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM PFP:24110
Wiring Diagram EBS00TP9
GEC441A
EC-88
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch OFF] 0 - 1.0V
ECM relay ● For a 4 seconds after turning ignition switch OFF
15 W/G
(Self shut-off) [Ignition switch OFF]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a 4 seconds passed after turning igni- (11 - 14V)
tion switch OFF
EC
(11 - 14V)
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
107 W BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM [Ignition switch ON]
108 W (11 - 14V)
EC-89
HEC728
EC-90
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
34 B
35 B [Engine is running]
ECM ground Engine ground
105 B/Y ● Idle speed
106 B/Y
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TPA
1. INSPECTION START EC
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 9.
No >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 31 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0791E

● Harness connectors M65, F104
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1, E103
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ignition switch
>> Repair harness or connectors.
EC-91
4. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 34, 35, 105, 106 and engine ground.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY-II

1. Disconnect ECM relay.
JEF100Y
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1, 6 and ground

with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
SEF420X

● 10A fuse
● 15A fuse
● Fusible link and fuse box connectors E67, E68, E70, E71
● Harness connectors E75, F36
● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and battery
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
EC-92
7. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and ECM relay terminal 2.
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK ECM RELAY

Refer to EC-95, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG EC
OK >> GO TO EC-153, "DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL".
NG >> Replace ECM relay.
9. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

1. Stop engine.
SULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB1739E

● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
EC-93
11. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
1. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminals 107, 108 and ground
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
voltage will exist for a 4 seconds, then drop
approximately 0V.
PBIB1660E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 12.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 14.
12. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V

JEF100Y
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 3 and ground with

CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> GO TO 13.
SEF860T

● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and F36
EC-94
14. CHECK ECM POSWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 107, 108 and ECM relay terminal 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
15. CHECK ECM RELAY

Refer to EC-95, "Component Inspection". EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 34, 35, 105, 106 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
17. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT

Refer to EC-87, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT".
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TPB
ECM RELAY
1. Apply 12V direct current between ECM relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between ECM relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
Condition Continuity
12V direct current supply
Yes
between terminals 1 and 2
OFF No
3. If NG, replace ECM relay.
PBIB0077E
EC-95
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
DTC P0100 MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR PFP:22680
Component Description EBS00TSZ
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It mea-
sures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. It consists of a hot wire that is supplied with electric current from
the ECM. The temperature of the hot wire is controlled by the ECM a
certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as
the intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.
SEF987W
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TT0
Specification data are reference values.

● Engine: After warming up Idle 1.0 - 1.7V
MAS A/F SE-B1
● Shift lever: N 2,500 rpm 1.5 - 2.1V
● No-load
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TT1
DTC No. Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause)
P0100 A) An excessively high voltage from the sensor is sent to ● Harness or connectors
0100 ECM when engine is not running. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Mass air flow sensor
B) An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent to ● Harness or connectors
ECM* when engine is running. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
C) A voltage from the sensor is constantly approx. 1.0V ● Intake air leaks
when engine is running. ● Mass air flow sensor
*: When the malfunction B is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel
Mass air flow sensor circuit
cut.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TT2
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 9 seconds before conducting the next test.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
EC-96
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Wait at least 2 seconds.
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-99, "Diagnostic Procedure".
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait at least 2 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 9 seconds and then turn ON.
EC
3. Perform Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) with ECM.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B AND C
With CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and wait 2 seconds at most.
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
EC-97
Wiring Diagram EBS00TT3
GEC442A
EC-98
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
MINAL COLO ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NO. R
[Engine is running]
Mass air flow sensor
ground
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
60 G Mass air flow sensor
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TT5
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (A, or B and C) is duplicated?
Malfunction A, or B and C
A >> GO TO 3.
B and C>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following for connection.
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
● Intake air passage between air duct to collector
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.
3. RETIGHTEN GROUND SCREWS

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
>> GO TO 4.
JEF104Y
EC-99
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
JEF105Y
3. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 2, 4 and

ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Terminal Voltage
2 Approximately 5V
4 Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0076E

● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and mass air flow sensor
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 56.
Refer to wiring diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 60.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
EC-100
8. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor.

Perform EC-87, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT".
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TT6
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR EC

3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 60 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Conditions Voltage V
Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Less than 1.2
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating tem-
1.0 - 1.7
perature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating
1.5 - 2.1
temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* 1.0 - 1.7 to Approx. 4.0
SEF106Y
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to increases to about

4,000 rpm in engine speed.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and connect it
again. Then repeat above check.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film
for damage or dust.
SEF987W
EC-101
DTC P0115 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR (CIRCUIT)
PFP:22630
Component Description EBS00TT7
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature Voltage* Resistance
°C (°F) V kΩ
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM
terminal 54 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P
CAUTION:
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TT8

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TT9
P0115 ● An excessively high or low voltage from the sensor is sent ● Harness or connectors
0115 to ECM.* (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
*: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
EC-102
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START.
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-II
Condition
display)
Engine coolant tempera- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F)
ture sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F)
Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while the engine is running. EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TTA
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF013Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-103
Wiring Diagram EBS00TTB
GEC443A
EC-104
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TTC
1. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ETC) sensor harness
connector.
EC
SEF999W
4. Check voltage between engine coolant temperature sensor ter-

minal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 5V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
PBIB0080E
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between engine coolant temperature sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 48,
TCM terminal 42.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor
● Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and engine coolant temperature
sensor.
EC-105
4. CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

PerformEC-87, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT".
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TTD
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB0081E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
Voltage* V Resistance kΩ
temperature °C (°F)
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
54 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor.

Removal and Installation EBS00TTU

Refer to “OUTER COMPONENT PARTS”, EM-10.
EC-106
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description EBS00TTE
The throttle position sensor responds to the accelerator pedal movement. This sensor is a kind of potentiome-
ter which transforms the throttle position into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, the sensor detects the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feeds the voltage signal to the
ECM.
Idle position of the throttle valve is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the throttle position sen-
sor. This sensor controls engine operation such as fuel cut. On the other hand, the “Wide open and closed
throttle position switch”, which is built into the throttle position sensor unit, is not used for engine control.
EC
NEF308A
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TTF

Throttle valve: fully closed 0.15 - 0.85V
the engine
THRTL POS SEN ● Engine: After warming up
● Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: fully opened 3.5 - 4.7V
(Engine stopped)
Throttle valve: fully closed 0.0° or 0.0%
the engine
ABSOL TH·P/S ● Engine: After warming up
● Ignition switch: ON Throttle valve: fully opened Approx. 80° or 80%
(Engine stopped)
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TTG
P0120 An excessively low or high voltage from the sensor is ● Harness or connectors
0120 sent to ECM* while driving. (The throttle position sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Throttle position sensor
*: When this malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
EC-107
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Throttle position will be determined based on the injected fuel amount and the engine speed.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Throttle position sensor Condition Driving condition
circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TTH
NOTE:
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
TESTING CONDITION:
● This test may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 2
consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE More than 4 km/h (2 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position except N or P position
SEF175Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least 2 consecutive seconds.
Vehicle speed More than 4 km/h (2 MPH)
Selector lever Suitable position except “N” or “P” posi-
tion
EC-108
Wiring Diagram EBS00TTI
EC
GEC444A
EC-109
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
NO. R
[Engine is running]
48 B Sensors' ground ● Warm up condition Approximately 0V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
57 Y Throttle position sensor ● Accelerator pedal fully released
3.7 - 4.5V
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TTK

>> GO TO 2.
JEF104Y
EC-110
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
1. Disconnect throttle position (TP) sensor harness connector.
JEF091Y
3. Check voltage between throttle position sensor terminal 3 and EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0138E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
4. Check harness continuity between throttle position sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 48, TCM terminal
42.Refer to wiring diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle position sensor.
● Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission Control Module) and throttle position sensor.
EC-111
5. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 57 and throttle position sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace throttle position sensor. To adjust it, perform EC-38, "Basic Inspection".

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TTL
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR

With CONSULT-II
5. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following condi-
tions.
NOTE:
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position
sensor installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions Voltage (V)
Completely closed 0.15 - 0.85
Completely open 3.5 - 4.7
SEF179Y
6. If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to EC-38,

"Basic Inspection".
If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch in Basic Inspection, replace throttle position sen-
sor.
Without CONSULT-II
EC-112
4. Check voltage between ECM terminal 57 (Throttle position sen-
sor signal) and ground under the following conditions.
NOTE:
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position
sensor installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions Voltage (V)
Completely closed 0.15 - 0.85
Completely open 3.5 - 4.7
5. If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to EC-38, SEF107Y
"Basic Inspection".
If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch in Basic Inspection, replace throttle position sen-
sor.
Removal and Inspection EBS00TTV
EC
EC-113
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS)
DTC P0325 KNOCK SENSOR (KS) PFP:22060
Component Description EBS00TPC
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Freeze frame data will not be stored in the ECM for the knock
sensor. The MIL will not light for knock sensor malfunction.
SEF598K
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TPD
P0325 ● An excessively low or high voltage from the knock sensor ● Harness or connectors
0325 is sent to ECM. (The knock sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
● Knock sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TPE
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
2. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-114
Wiring Diagram EBS00TPF
EC
HEC735
EC-115
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
NAL ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
62 W Knock sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TPG

>> GO TO 2.
JEF104Y
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between knock sensor terminal 1 and
ECM terminal 62.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. JEF110Y
3. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-116
Component Inspection EBS00TPH
KNOCK SENSOR
● Use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
2. Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
Resistance: 500 - 620 kΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]
CAUTION:
Discard any knock sensors that have been dropped or physi-
cally damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF111Y
EC
Removal and Installation EBS00TPI
KNOCK SENSOR
Refer to “CYLINDER BLOCK”, EM-62.
EC-117
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731
Component Description EBS00TPJ
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the right-rear

wall of the cylinder block in relation to the signal plate at the rear end
of the crankshaft.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet, and hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
PBIB0562E
the engine revolution.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TPK
P0335 ● The 10° signal is not entered to ECM for the first few ● Harness or connectors
0335 seconds during engine cranking. (The crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit is open
● The 10° signal is not entered to ECM during engine or shorted.)
running. ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● The 10° signal is not in the normal pattern at each ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-13.)
engine revolution. ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-13.)
● Dead (Weak) battery
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TPL
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V.
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-118
Wiring Diagram EBS00TPM
EC
GEC445A
EC-119
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
3 - 4V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
SEF979W
51 Crankshaft position
R
(49)* sensor 3 - 4V
[Engine is running]
SEF980W
*: ( ) indicates Middle East Models.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TPO

>> GO TO 2.
JEF104Y
EC-120
2. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor harness connector.
JEF112Y
3. Check voltage between crankshaft position sensor terminal 3 EC

and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SEF509Y

● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor and ECM relay
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor and ECM
4. CHECK CKP SENOSR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between crankshaft position sensor terminal 1 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-121
5. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connectors.
2. Check continuity between ECM terminal 49 (Models for the Mid-
dle East) 51 (Models except for the Middle East) and crankshaft
position sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
JEF112Y
6. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TPP
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

1. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
2. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
PBIB0563E
5. Check resistance as shown in the figure.

Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 (+) - 1 (–)
2 (+) - 1 (–) Except 0 or ∞
3 (+) - 2 (–)
6. If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor.
MBIB0024E
EC-122
Removal and Installation EBS00TPQ

EC
EC-123
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731
Component Description EBS00TPR
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion pro-

vided of exhaust valve cam sprocket to identify a particular cylinder.
The crankshaft position sensor senses the piston position.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and hall IC.
change.
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the cylinder num-
PBIB0562E
ber signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TPS
P0340 ● The cylinder No. signal is not entered to ECM for the ● Harness or connectors
0340 first few seconds during engine cranking. (The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit is open
● The cylinder No. signal is not enter to ECM during or shorted.)
engine running. ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal pattern dur- ● Starter motor (Refer to SC-13.)
ing engine running. ● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-13.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TPT
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds.
EC-124
Wiring Diagram EBS00TPU
EC
GEC446A
EC-125
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
3 - 4V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
SEF977W
50 W Camshaft position sen-
(52)* W sor (PHASE) 3 - 4V
[Engine is running]
SEF978W
*: ( ) indicates Middle East Models.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TPW
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Does the engine turn over?
(Does the starter motor operate?)
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to SC section.)

>> GO TO 3.
JEF104Y
EC-126
3. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor harness connector.
JEF114Y
3. Check voltage between camshaft position sensor terminal 3 and EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF509Y

● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor and ECM relay
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor and ECM
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPNE AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) terminal 1 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-127
6. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPNE ANS SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between camshaft position sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 50 (Models
except for the Middle East), 52 (Models for the Middle East).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7
7. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TPX
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

1. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
PBIB0563E

3 (+) - 1 (–)
2 (+) - 1 (–) Except 0 or ∞
3 (+) - 2 (–)
6. If NG, replace camshaft position sensor.
MBIB0024E
EC-128
Removal and Installation EBS00TPY

Refer to “TIMING CHAIN”, EM-23 (QG13DE engine models) or “CYLINDER HEAD”, EM-42 (QG16DE and
QG18DE engine models).
EC
EC-129
DTC P0500 VSS
DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702
Component Description EBS00TPZ
The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a

pulse generator which provides a vehicle speed signal to the speed-
ometer. The speedometer then sends a signal to the ECM.
SEF080X
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TQ0
P0500 ● The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from vehicle speed sen- ● Harness or connector
0500 sor is sent to ECM even when vehicle is being driven. (The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TQ1
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Lift up vehicle.
2. Start engine.
3. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminal 110 (Vehicle speed sensor signal) and ground with oscillo-
scope.
4. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown in figure.
If OK, go to following step.
SEF115Y
EC-130
DTC P0500 VSS
6. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-II should exceed 10
km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
9. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
10. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec-
onds.
NOTE: SEF196Y
Driving vehicle uphill (Increased engine load) will help maintain
the driving conditions required for this test.
ENG SPEED 1,800 - 2,200 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F) EC
B/FUEL SCHDL QG13DE 3.3 - 5.5 msec
QG16DE 4.7 - 6.5 msec
QG18DE 4.3 - 6.5 msec
Selector lever Suitable position
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
Overall Function Check EBS00TQ2
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed sensor circuit. During this check, a DTC
might not be confirmed.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Lift up vehicle.
2. Start engine.
3. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminal 110 (Vehicle speed sensor signal) and ground with oscillo-
scope.
4. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown in figure.
SEF115Y
EC-131
DTC P0500 VSS
Wiring Diagram EBS00TQ3
HEC737
EC-132
DTC P0500 VSS
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
2.5 - 3V
[Engine is running]
● Lift up the vehicle
110 PU/R Vehicle speed sensor
● In 2nd gear position
● Vehicle speed is 40 km/h (25 MPH)
SEF976W
EC
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TQ5
1. CHECK VEHCLE SPEED SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPNE AND SHORT
3. Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 110 and combination meter terminal 57.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and combination meter
3. CHECK SPEEDOMETER FUNCTION

Make sure that speedometer functions properly.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

● Harness for open or short between combination meter and vehicle speed sensor
>> Repair harness or connectors. Check vehicle speed sensor and its circuit. Refer to EL section.
EC-133
DTC P0500 VSS
>> INSPECTION END
EC-134
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC P0600 A/T COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
System Description EBS00TQ6
These circuit lines are used to control the smooth shifting up and down of A/T during the hard acceleration/
deceleration. Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and TCM (Transmission control module).
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TQ7
P0600 ● ECM receives incorrect voltage from TCM (Transmission ● Harness or connectors
0600 control module) continuously. [The circuit between ECM and TCM (Transmission
control module) is open or shorted.]
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TQ8
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at EC
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V at idle.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine, and let it idle for at least 15 seconds.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine, and run it for at least 15 seconds at idle speed.
EC-135
Wiring Diagram EBS00TQ9
HEC740
EC-136
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
NO. R
[Engine is running]
18 Y/B A/T signal No. 3 0.05 - 0.7V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
19 BR/W A/T signal No. 5 Approximately 8V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
45 Y/R A/T signal No. 1 0.05 - 0.7V
● Idle speed
46 Y/G A/T signal No. 2 0.05 - 0.7V
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
47 G/Y A/T signal No. 4 0.05 - 0.7V
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TQB
1. CHECK A/T CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector and TCM (Transmission
control module) harness connector.
SEF116Y
3. Check harness continuity between the following terminals.

ECM TCM
45 5
46 6
18 7
47 9
19 8

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Repair harness or connectors.
EC-137
2. CHECK A/T CONTROL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 18, 19, 45, 46, 47 and ground.
Continuity should not exist.
2. Also check harness for short to ground short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-138
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000
System Description EBS00TQC
COOLING FAN CONTROL

ECM func-
tion
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal ECM Cooling fan relay(s)
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3 step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF]. EC
OPERATION
SEC937C
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TQD

MONITOR
CONDITION SPECIFICATION
ITEM
AIR COND
● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Air conditioner switch: ON
SIG ON
EC-139
MONITOR
ITEM
Engine coolant tempera-
OFF
ture is 94°C (201°F) or less
COOLING ● After warming up engine, idle the engine. ture is between 95°C LOW
FAN ● Air conditioner switch: OFF (203°F) and 104°C (219°F)
ture is 105°C (221°F) or HIGH
more
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TQE
P1217 ● The engine coolant temperature is extraordinary high, ● Harness or connectors
1217 even when the load is not heavy. (The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted)
● Cooling fan
● Thermostat
● Improper ignition timing
● Blocked radiator
● Blocked front end (Improper fitting of nose mask)
● Crushed vehicle frontal area (Vehicle frontal is col-
lided but not repaired)
● Blocked air passage by improper installation of
front fog lamp or fog lamps.
● Improper mixture ratio of coolant
● Damaged bumper
For more information, refer to EC-151, "Main 12
Causes of Overheating".
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to “Changing Engine Coolant”,
LC-18. Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to “Changing Engine Oil”, LC-7.
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to “Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio”, MA-9.
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check EBS00TQF
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
EC-140
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
If the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator is below
the proper range, skip the following steps and go to EC-144,
"Diagnostic Procedure".
2. Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not. If customer
filled the coolant, skip the following steps and go to EC-144,
SEF621W
4. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-

SULT-II. EC
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-144, "Diagnostic Procedure".
SEF646X
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
3. Start engine.
Be careful not to overheat engine.
4. Set temperature control lever to full cold position. SEF621W
5. Turn air conditioner switch ON.

6. Turn blower fan switch ON.
7. Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner operating.
8. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
If NG, go to EC-144, "Diagnostic Procedure".
If OK, go to the following step.
10. Turn air conditioner switch and blower fan switch OFF.
11. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor.
12. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
SEC163BA
EC-141
13. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at
higher speed than low speed.
MEC475B
EC-142
Wiring Diagram EBS00TQG
EC
GEC447A
EC-143
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
NO. R
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Cooling fan is operating at high speed
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Cooling fan is operating at low or high speed
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TQI
1. INSPECTION START
Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 4.
2. CHECK COOLING FAN LOW SPEED OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
SULT-II.
3. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
148, "PROCEDURE A".)
SEF784Z
3. CHECK COOLING FAN HIGH SPEED OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
SULT-II.
2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed
than low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Check cooling fan high speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
150, "PROCEDURE B".)
SEF785Z
EC-144
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
2. Start engine and let it idle.
3. Set temperature lever at full cold position.
SEF146Y
EC
SEC163BA
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-148, "PROCEDURE A".)

Without CONSULT-II
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
4. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
6. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 oper-
ate at higher speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
MEF613EA
EC-145
6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the
pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
SLC754A

Check the following for leak.
● Hose
● Radiator
● Water pump (Refer to “Water Pump”, LC-13.)
>> Repair or replace.
8. CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief
pressure.
Radiator cap 59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0
relief pressure: kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.
SLC755A
9. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature: 82°C (180°F) [standard]
Valve lift: More than 8 mm/95°C
(0.31 in/203°F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening tem-
perature. For details, refer to “Thermostat”, LC-15.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace thermostat. SLC343
EC-146
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

● If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-151, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating".
>> INSPECTION END
EC
EC-147
PROCEDURE A
1. CHECK COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 6 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0951E

● 10A fuse
● 40A fusible links
● Fuse block (J/B) connector E104
● Fusible link and fuse box connectors E67, E68, E69
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery
3. CHECK COOLING FAN GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling
fan motor-2 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-1 terminal 5
and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 1, cooling fan motor-1 terminal
4 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. JEF160Y

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-148
4. CHECK COOLING FAN OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2. Refer to Wiring
Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

Check the following. EC
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM
6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace cooling fan relay.
7. CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace cooling fan motors.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-149
PROCEDURE B

4. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 terminals 1,
3 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0424E

● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fuse
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fusible link

2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between cooling fan relay-2 terminal 5 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 2, cool-
ing fan relay-2 terminal 6 and cooling fan motor-1 terminal 3, cooling fan relay-2 terminal 7 and engine
ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-150
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3
terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and ECM
6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace cooling fan relays.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

>> INSPECTION END

Main 12 Causes of Overheating EBS00TQJ
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked condenser
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See “RECOMMENDED
FLUIDS AND LUBRI-
CANTS”, MA-8.
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level See “Changing Engine
in reservoir tank and radi- Coolant”, LC-18.
ator filler neck
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 See “System Check”, LC-
bar, 0.6 - 1.0 kg/cm2, 9 - 11.
14 psi) (Limit)
EC-151
ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks See “System Check”, LC-

11.
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See “Thermostat”, LC-15
lower radiator hoses and “Radiator”, LC-17.
ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217, EC-139.
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driv- See “Changing Engine
reservoir tank ing and idling Coolant”, LC-18.
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in See “REFILLING
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank ENGINE COOLANT”, LC-
tor 19.
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See“Inspection”, EM-45.
gauge mum distortion (warping)
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See “Inspection”, EM-45.
tons walls or piston
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to “Overheating Cause Analysis”, LC-25.
Component Inspection EBS00TQK
COOLING FAN RELAYS-1, -2 AND -3

1. Apply 12V direct current between cooling fan relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between cooling fan relay terminals 3 and 5, 6
and 7.
Conditions Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Yes
No current supply No
3. If NG, replace relay.
SEF745U
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Terminals
Speed
(+) (−)
Low 1 4
Cooling fan motor
High 1, 2 3, 4
Cooling fan motor should operate.

3. If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
SEF734W
EC-152
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL
DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448
Component Description EBS00TQL
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
power transistor. The power transistor turns on and off the ignition
coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
JEF119Y
EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TQM

On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TQN
P1320 ● The ignition signal in the primary circuit is not sent to ECM ● Harness or connectors (The ignition primary circuit
1320 during engine cranking or running. is open or shorted.)
● Power transistor unit built into ignition coil
● Condenser
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TQO
NOTE:
● If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait
at least 9 seconds before conducting the next test.
● If DTC P1320 is displayed with DTC P0335 or P0340, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335,
P0340 first. Refer to EC-118 or EC-124.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to
START for at least 5 seconds.)
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
2. Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to START for at least 5 seconds.)
EC-153
EC-154
Wiring Diagram EBS00TQP
EC
GEC448A
EC-155
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
15 W/G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF
108 W (11 - 14V)
EC-156
EC
GEC449A
EC-157
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
9 B/R Ignition signal (No. 1)

SEF971W
10 PU Ignition signal (No. 2)
11 L/R Ignition signal (No. 3) 0.2 - 0.4V
12 GY/R Ignition signal (No. 4)
[Engine is running]
SEF972W
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TQR
1. CHECK ENGINE START

Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 11.
No >> GO TO 3.
2. SEARCH FOR MALFUNCTIONING CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
2. Search for circuit which does not produce a momentary engine
speed drop.
SEF190Y
>> GO TO 12.
EC-158
3. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to EC-88, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM".
PBIB1661E
EC
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
JEF121Y
4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0624E
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 7 and
condenser terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
JEF100Y
EC-159
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 6 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
MBIB0001E

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open and short between ECM relay and fuse
>> Repair or open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
8. CHECK ECM RELAY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
9. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
3. Also check harness for and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK CONDENSER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace condenser.
EC-160
11. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
JEF119Y EC
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.
SEF107S

Check the harness for open or short between ignition coil and ECM relay.
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
13. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 9, 10, 11, 12 and ignition coil terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
EC-161
15. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TQS
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR

1. Disconnect ignition coil with power transistor harness connector.
2. Check ignition coil with power transistor for resistance as show
in the figure.
3 (+) - 2 (−) Except 0 or ∞
1 (+) - 3 (−)
Except 0
1 (+) - 2 (−)
3. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor assembly.
SEF371Q
ECM RELAY
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals 1 and 2
OFF No
SEF123Y
EC-162
CONDENSER
2. Check condenser continuity condenser between terminals 1 and
2.
Resistance: Above 1 MΩ at 25°C (77°F)
3. If NG, replace condenser.
SEF124Y
Removal and Installation EBS00YN3

EC
EC-163
EGR SYSTEM
EGR SYSTEM PFP:14700
Description EBS00TQT
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM func-
tion
Engine speed
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature EGR con-
EGRC-solenoid valve
trol
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
This system cuts and controls vacuum applied to the EGR valve to suit engine operating conditions. This cut-
and-control operation is accomplished through the ECM and the EGRC-solenoid valve. When the ECM
detects any of the following conditions, current flows through the solenoid valve is cut. This causes the vac-
uum to be discharged into the atmosphere. The EGR valve remains closed.
● Low engine coolant temperature
● Engine starting
● Extremely light load engine operation
● Engine idling
● Excessively high engine coolant temperature
● Extremely low vehicle speed
● Mass air flow sensor malfunction
SEF127Y
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve
The EGR valve controls the amount of exhaust gas routed to the
intake manifold. Vacuum is applied to the EGR valve in response to
EGRC-solenoid valve moving. The vacuum controls the movement
of a taper valve connected to the vacuum diaphragm in the EGR
valve.
SEF783K
EC-164
EGR SYSTEM
EGRC-Solenoid Valve
The EGRC-solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When
the ECM sends an ON (ground) signal, the coil in the solenoid valve
is energized. The vacuum signal passes through the solenoid valve.
The signal then reaches the EGR valve.
When the ECM sends an OFF signal, a plunger will then move to cut
the vacuum signal from the intake manifold collector to the EGR
valve.
SEF318UD
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TQU
Specification data are reference values. EC

Idle OFF
● Engine: After warming up
EGRC SOL/V Revving engine up from 2,000 to
● Lift up drive wheels and shift gear
“ON” 3,000 rpm [More than 24 km/h (15 ON
MPH)]
EC-165
EGR SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram EBS00TQV
GEC450A
EC-166
EGR SYSTEM
CAUTION:
TERMI- WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NAL NO. COLOR
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
38 W/PU EGRC-solenoid valve [Vehicle is running]
0 - 1V
● Revving engine up from 2,000 to 3,000 rpm [More
than 24 km/h (15 MPH)]
EC
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TQX
1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 6.
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Select “EGRC-SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
4. Touch “ON/OFF”.
When the EGRC-solenoid valve is repeatedly switching between ON/OFF, make sure that the engine con-
dition changes accordingly.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK EGRC-SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION

With CONSULT-II
1. Stop engine, and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Turn the EGRC-solenoid valve ON/OFF again, and check for operating sound.
Clicking noise should be heard.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 10.
EC-167
EGR SYSTEM
4. CHECK VACUUM HOSE TO EGR VALVE
With CONSULT-II
2. Disconnect vacuum hose to EGR valve.
3. Check for vacuum existence when EGRC-solenoid valve ON for “ACTIVE TEST” in “CONSULT-II”.
Check for vacuum under the following conditions.
SEF128Y
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

2. Check vacuum hose for clogging, cracks or improper connec-
tion.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG >> Repair or replace vacuum hose.
SEF109L

Without CONSULT-II
2. Lift up driving wheel, and rev engine from 2,000 rpm up to 3,000 rpm for suitable gear position [More than
24 km/h (15 MPH)].
3. At that moment, place a finger on the EGR valve diaphragm to make sure the EGR valve is operating.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 7.
EC-168
EGR SYSTEM
7. CHECK VACUUM HOSE TO EGR VALVE
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect vacuum hose to EGR valve.
2. Check for vacuum not existence at idle.
3. Check for vacuum existence when EGRC-solenoid valve ON.
Vacuum should exist when EGRC-solenoid valve ON, revving engine from 2,000 rpm up to 3,000 rpm for
suitable gear position.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 9.
8. CHECK EGR VALVE

EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Replace EGR valve.
9. CHECK VACUUM HOSE

2. Check vacuum hose for clogging, cracks or improper connec-
tion.
SEF109L
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair or replace vacuum hose.
10. CHECK EGRC-SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

2. Disconnect EGRC-solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Check voltage between EGRC-solenoid valve terminals 1 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
PBIB0080E
EC-169
EGR SYSTEM
Check the harness for open or short between EGRC-solenoid valve and ECM relay.
12. CHECK EGRC-SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between EGRC-solenoid valve terminal 2 and ECM terminal 38. Refer to wiring
diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
13. CHECK EGRC-SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Replace EGRC-solenoid valve.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TQY
EGR VALVE
● Apply vacuum to EGR vacuum port with a hand vacuum pump.
EGR valve spring should lift.
● Check for sticking.
If NG, repair or replace EGR valve.
Vacuum EGR valve operation
6.7 kPa (–67 mbar, –50 mmHg, –1.97 inHg) Starting
–12.0 kPa (–120 mbar, –90 mmHg, –3.54 inHg) Full lift
MEF137D
EGRC-SOLENOID VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Check air passage continuity.
EC-170
EGR SYSTEM
2. Perform “EGRC SOL/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
EGRC SOLENOID VALVE between A and B between A and C
ON Yes No
OFF No Yes
3. If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace solenoid
valve.
4. Check solenoid valve continuity between EGRC-solenoid valve
terminals 1 and 2. SEF129Y
Resistance: 31 - 35Ω at 20°C (68°F)

Without CONSULT-II
1. Check air passage continuity. EC
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B between A and C
between terminals 1 and Yes No
2
No supply No Yes
2. If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace solenoid
valve.
AEC919
3. Check solenoid valve continuity between EGRC-solenoid valve
terminals 1 and 2.
EC-171
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920
Description EBS00TQZ
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM func-
tion
Engine speed
EVAP can-
Ignition switch Start signal EVAP canister purge volume
ister purge
control solenoid valve
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering signal control

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner signal
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
SEF337U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TR0

Idle 0%
● No-load More than 30 seconds after starting
PURG VOL C/V engine
● Lift up drive wheels and suitable 30 - 100%
Rev engine up from 2,000 to 4,000
gear position
rpm.
EC-172
Wiring Diagram EBS00TR1
EC
GEC451A
EC-173
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
NO. R
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
EVAP canister purge vol-
5 P [Vehicle is running]
ume control solenoid valve
5 - 12V
● Lift up drive wheels and suitable gear position
● Revving engine up from 2,000 to 4,000 rpm
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TR3
1. INSPECTION START
1. Do you have CONSULT-II?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Remove the purge vacuum hose between the EVAP canister and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve at the EVAP canister.
4. Touch “UP/DOWN” on CONSULT-II screen. Check to see if vac-
uum exists under the following conditions.
Condition
Vacuum
PURG VOL CONT/V
0% No
100% Yes
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0721E
EC-174
Without CONSULT-II
1. LIft up vehicle, start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
2. Remove the purge vacuum hose between the EVAP canister and EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve at the EVAP canister.
3. Check to see if vacuum exists when revving engine from 2,000 to 4,000 rpm in a suitable gear position
other than P or N.
Condition Vacuum
When depressing accelerator pedal Yes
When releasing accelerator pedal completely No
OK or NG
EC
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY

2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
JEF126Y

4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve terminals 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or
tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0080E

● 10A fuse
● Harness connectors E75, F36.
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and fuse block.
EC-175
6. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 5 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to wiring diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK RUBBER TUBE FOR CLOGGING

1. Disconnect rubber tube connected to EVAP canister and intake manifold.
2. Check the rubber tube for clogging.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Clean the rubber tube using an air blower.
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TR4

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
PBIB0721E
EC-176
Condition Air passage continuity
PURG VOL CONT/V value between A and B
100% Yes
0% No
4. If OK, inspection end. If NG, go to following step.
If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace the EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
5. Check solenoid valve continuity between EVAP canister purge SEF079X
volume control solenoid valve terminals 1 and 2.
Without CONSULT-II
EC
Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between ter-
Yes
minals
No supply No
2. If NG or operation takes more than 1 second, replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
3. Check solenoid valve continuity between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve terminals 1
and 2.
Removal and Installation EBS00TR5

Refer to “OUTEER COMPONENT PARTS”, EM-10.
EC-177
IDLE AIR CONTROL VALVE (IACV)-AUXILIARY AIR CONTROL (AAC) VALVE
PFP:00000
Description EBS00TR6
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM func-
tion
Engine speed
PNP switch Park/Neutral position
Idle air
IACV-AAC valve
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation control
Power steering oil pressure switch Power steering load signal
Cooling fan Cooling fan operation
Electrical load Electrical load signal
This system automatically controls engine idle speed to a specified level. Idle speed is controlled through fine
adjustment of the amount of air which by-passes the throttle valve via IACV-AAC valve. The IACV-AAC valve
changes the opening of the air by-pass passage to control the amount of auxiliary air. This valve is actuated by
a step motor built into the valve, which moves the valve in the axial direction in steps corresponding to the
ECM output signals. One step of IACV-AAC valve movement causes the respective opening of the air by-pass
passage. (i.e. when the step advances, the opening is enlarged.) The opening of the valve is varied to allow
for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft position sensor (POS) detects the actual
engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then controls the step position of the IACV-AAC valve
so that engine speed coincides with the target value memorized in ECM. The target engine speed is the low-
est speed at which the engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by
taking into consideration various engine conditions, such as during warm up, deceleration, and engine load
(air conditioner, power steering, cooling fan operation and electrical load).
The IACV-AAC valve is operated by a step motor for centralized con-
trol of auxiliary air supply. This motor has four winding phases and is
actuated by the output signals of ECM which turns ON and OFF two
windings each in sequence. Each time the IACV-AAC valve opens or
closes to change the auxiliary air quantity, the ECM sends a pulse
signal to the step motor. When no change in the auxiliary air quantity
is needed, the ECM does not issue the pulse signal. A certain volt-
age signal is issued so that the valve remains at that particular open-
ing.
SEF937W
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TR7

● Engine: After warming up Idle 5 - 30 steps
IACV-AAC/V
● Shift lever: N 2,000 rpm —
● No-load
EC-178
Wiring Diagram EBS00TR8
EC
GEC452A
EC-179
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
101 BR [Engine is running]
102 LG
IACV-AAC valve ● Warm-up condition 0.1 - 14V
103 P
104 OR ● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TRA

2. Read the voltage signal between ECM terminals 101, 102, 103, 104 (IACV-AAC valve signal) and ground
with an oscilloscope.
3. Turn ignition switch ON, wait at least 5 seconds and then OFF.
4. Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as shown below at least once every 9 seconds
after turning ignition switch OFF.
SEF922Y
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE POWER SUPPLY CURCUIT-I

2. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
4. Check voltage between IACV-AAC valve terminal 2, 5 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0627E
EC-180
Check the harness for open or short between IACV-AAC valve and ECM relay.
4. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

3. Check harness continuity between the following terminal. Refer to wiring diagram.
ECM IACV-AAC valve
101 1
EC
102 4
103 3
104 6

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-I

1. Reconnect the ECM harness connector and IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose connected to the air control valve (Power steering) at intake air duct.
4. Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence.
SEF923Y
Vacuum slightly exists or does not exist

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace air control valve (Power steering).
EC-181
6. CHECK AIR CONTROL VALVE (POWER STEERING) OPERATION-II
Check the vacuum hose for vacuum existence when steering wheel is turned.
SEF923Y
Vacuum should exist.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK VACUUM PORT

1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose connected to the air control valve (Power steering) at the vacuum port.
3. Blow air into vacuum port.
4. Check that air flows freely.
SEF924Y
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair or clean vacuum port.
8. CHECK VACUUM HOSES AND TUBES

1. Disconnect vacuum hoses between the air control valve (Power steering) and vacuum port, air control
valve (Power steering) and air duct.
2. Check hoses and tubes for cracks, clogging, improper connec-
tion or disconnection.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair hoses or tubes.
SEF109L
EC-182
9. CHECK IACV-AAC VALVE
Refer toEC-184, "Component Inspection".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
10. REPLACE IACV-AAC VALVE

1. Replace IACV-AAC valve assembly.
2. Perform EC-23, "Idle Air Volume Learning".
Yes or No
Yes >> INSPECTION END
No >> Follow the construction of “Idle Air Volume Learning”. EC

2. Reconnect all harness connectors and vacuum hose.
4. Also warm up transmission to normal operating temperature.
– Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
5. Stop vehicle with engine running.
6. Check target idle speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Perform EC-23, "Idle Air Volume Learning".

>> INSPECTION END
EC-183
Component Inspection EBS00TRB
IACV-AAC VALVE
1. Disconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
2. Check IACV-AAC valve resistance.
Condition Resistance
Terminal 2 and terminals 1, 3
20 - 24Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
Terminal 5 and terminals 4, 6
3. Reconnect IACV-AAC valve harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and OFF, and ensure the IACV-AAC
valve, makes operating sound and according to the ignition
switch position.
5. If NG, replace the IACV-AAC valve.
SEF125Y
EC-184
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH PFP:22620
Component Description EBS00TRC
A closed throttle position switch and wide open throttle position

switch are built into the throttle position sensor unit. The wide open
throttle position switch is not used.
When the throttle valve is in the closed position, the closed throttle
position switch sends a voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM only
uses this signal to open or close the EVAP canister purge control
valve when the throttle position sensor is malfunctioning.
SEF505V
EC
EC-185
Wiring Diagram EBS00TRE
GEC453A
EC-186
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
NO. R
Throttle position switch ● Accelerator pedal fully released (11 - 14V)
43 Y/PU
(Closed position) [Ignition switch ON]
Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TRF
1. INSPECTION START EC
Yes or No
No (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “A/T” and then select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check indication of “CLSD THL/P SW” under the following conditions. Measurement must be made with
throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions CLSD THL/P SW
Completely closed ON
Partially open or completely open OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 4.

Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 43 (closed throttle posi-
tion switch signal) and ground under the following conditions.
Throttle valve conditions Continuity
Completely closed Yes
Partially open or completely open No
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0578E
EC-187
4. CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
JEF091Y
4. Check voltage between throttle position switch terminal 5 and

engine ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
SEF250W

● Harness for open or short between throttle position switch and fuse block.
● 10A fuse
6. CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 43 and throttle position switch terminal 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. ADJUST THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH IDLE POSITION

Perform EC-38, "Basic Inspection".
>> GO TO 8.
EC-188
8. CHECK CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 9.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace throttle position switch.

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “ENGINE” and then select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
2. Check voltage of “THRTL POS SEN” under the following conditions.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
EC
Throttle valve conditions THRTL POS SEN
Completely closed 0.15 - 0.85V
Completely open 3.5 - 4.7V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace throttle position sensor.

Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 57 (Throttle position sensor signal) and ground.
Voltage measurement must be made with throttle position sensor installed in vehicle.
SEC758D
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace throttle position sensor.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TRG

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode in A/T SECTION with CONSULT-II.
EC-189
3. Check indication of “CLOSED THL/SW” under the following con-
ditions.
NOTE:
Measurement must be made with closed throttle position
switch installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions CLOSED THL/SW
Completely closed ON
Partially open or completely open OFF
4. If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to EC-38, SEF034Y
"Basic Inspection".
5. If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch in “Basic Inspection”, replace closed throttle posi-
tion switch.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Disconnect throttle position switch harness connector.
2. Check continuity between throttle position switch terminals 4 and 5 under the following conditions. Refer
to wiring diagram.
NOTE:
Continuity measurement must be made with closed throttle position switch installed in vehicle.
Throttle valve conditions Continuity
Completely closed Yes
Partially open or completely open No
3. If NG, adjust closed throttle position switch. Refer to EC-38, "Basic Inspection".
4. If it is impossible to adjust closed throttle position switch in “Basic Inspection”, replace closed throttle posi-
tion switch.
EC-190
PNP SWITCH
PNP SWITCH PFP:32006
Component Description EBS00TRH
When the gear position is Neutral (M/T models), P or N (A/T mod-

els), park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the park/neutral position when continuity with ground
exists.
SEF740W
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TRI

EC

Shift lever: Neutral (M/T models)
ON
P/N POSI SW ● Ignition switch: ON P or N (A/T models)
Except above OFF
EC-191
PNP SWITCH
Wiring Diagram EBS00TRJ
GEC454A
EC-192
PNP SWITCH
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
NO. R
● Gear position is Neutral position (M/T models) Approximately 0V
29 G/OR PNP switch ● Gear position is P or N (A/T models)
● Except the above gear position (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TRL

EC
1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal
Neutral position (M/T models).
ON
N and P position (A/T models).
Except the above position. OFF
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0102E

Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 29 (PNP signal) and
ground under the following conditions.
Condition Voltage
Gear position is Neutral (M/T models).
0V
Gear position is N or P (A/T models).
Except the above gear position. BATTERY VOLTAGE
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4. PBIB0441E
EC-193
PNP SWITCH
4. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and
body ground. Refer to wiring diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or con-
nectors.
SEF740W
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and PNP switch terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK PNP SWITCH

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS”, AT-167 or “PNP SWITCH”, MT-15.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace PNP switch.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-194
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
INJECTOR CIRCUIT PFP:16600
Component Description EBS00TRM
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount
of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse
duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM
controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
SEF138X
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TRN

EC

INJ PULSE-B1
● Shift lever: N 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 3.2 msec
● No-load
B/FUEL SCHDL
● Shift lever: N 2,000 rpm 1.5 - 2.7 msec
● No-load
EC-195
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram EBS00TRO
GEC455A
EC-196
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
1 R/B Injector No. 1 EC

SEF011W
3 G/B Injector No. 3 BATTERY VOLTAGE
4 L/B Injector No. 4 (11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
SEF012W
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TRQ
1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
EC-197
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
SEF190Y
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
PBIB1725E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Stop engine.
2. Disconnect injector harness connector.
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0582E
EC-198
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
● 10A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connector M1
● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. EC
3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 1, 2, 3, 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK INJECTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace injector.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TRR
INJECTOR
2. Check resistance between injector terminals as shown in the fig-
ure.
Resistance: 13.5 - 17.5Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace injector.
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation EBS00YMZ
INJECTOR
Refer to EC-26, "Injector".
EC-199
START SIGNAL
START SIGNAL PFP:48750
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TRS

EC-200
START SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram EBS00TRT
EC
HEC743
EC-201
START SIGNAL
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
NO. R
[Ignition switch ON] Approximately 0V
42 B/Y Start signal
[Ignition switch START] 9 - 12V
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TRV
1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
2. Check “START SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II under the following conditions.
Condition START SIGNAL
Ignition switch ON OFF
Ignition switch START ON
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0433E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch to START.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 42 and ground under the
following conditions.
Condition Voltage
Ignition switch START Battery voltage
Other positions Approximately 0V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0183E
EC-202
START SIGNAL
● 10A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connectors M2, E104
● Harness for open or short between ECM and ignition switch
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

Perform EC-87, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT". EC
>> INSPECTION END
EC-203
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT PFP:17042
Description EBS00TTW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ECM func-
tion
Engine speed Fuel pump
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump relay
control
Ignition switch Ignition signal & start signal
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine
startability. If the ECM receives a 180° signal from the camshaft position sensor, it knows that the engine is
rotating, and causes the pump to perform. If the 180° signal is not received when the ignition switch is on, the
engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The
ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the
fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second
Engine running and cranking Operates
When engine is stopped (Signal is not sent from camshaft position sensor.) Stops in 1.5 seconds
Except as shown above Stops
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
SEF605X
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TRW

● Ignition switch is turned to ON (Operates for 1 second)
● Engine running and cranking ON
FUEL PUMP RLY
● When engine is stopped (Stops in 1.5 seconds)
● Except as shown above OFF
EC-204
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram EBS00TRX
EC
GEC456A
EC-205
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
NO. R
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1V
B/P Fuel pump relay
(20)*
● More than 1 second after turning ignition switch ON (11 - 14V)
*: ( ) indicates Middle East Model.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TRZ

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed hose
for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
JEF133Y
EC-206
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay.
JEF134Y
EC
4. Check voltage between fuel pump relay terminals 1, 5 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0303E

● 10A fuse
● 15A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connector B4
● Harness for open or short between fuse and fuel pump relay
4. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness con-
nector.
3. Check harness continuity between fuel level sensor unit and fuel
pump terminal 3 and body ground, fuel level sensor unit and fuel
pump terminal 5 and fuel pump relay terminal 3.
OK or NG
JEF135Y
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
EC-207
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
● Harness for open or short between fuel pump and body ground
● Harness for open or short between fuel pump and fuel pump relay
6. CHECK CONDENSOR CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect condenser harness connector
2. Check harness continuity between fuel pump relay terminal 3 and condenser terminal 1, condenser termi-
nal 2 and body ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

Check to following.
● Harness for open or short between fuel pump relay and condenser
● Harness for open or short between condenser and body ground
8. CKECK CONDENSER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 17 (Models except for the Middle East), 20 (Models for
the Middle East) and fuel pump relay terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.

● Harness connectors B1, M17
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay
EC-208
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
11. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace fuel pump relay.
12. CHECK FUEL PUMP

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace fuel pump.
13. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT EC
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TTX
FUEL PUMP RELAY

1. Check continuity between fuel pump relay terminals 3 and 5.
SEF145X
FUEL PUMP
1. Disconnect fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump harness connector.
2. Check resistance between fuel pump terminals 3 and 5.
3. If NG, replace fuel pump.
JEF136Y
CONDENSER
EC-209
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
2. Check condenser continuity between condenser terminals 1 and
2.
3. If NG, replace condenser.
SEF124Y
Removal and Installation EBS00YN4
FUEL PUMP
Refer to “Fuel Level Sensor Unit, Fuel Filter and Fuel Pump Assembly”, FE-11.
EC-210
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT PFP:49761
Component Description EBS00TS0
The power steering oil pressure switch is attached to the power

steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load.
When a power steering load is detected, it signals the ECM. The
ECM adjusts the IACV-AAC valve to increase the idle speed and
adjust for the increased load.
JEF137Y
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TS1

EC

Steering wheel in neutral position
● Engine: After warming up, idle the OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL (forward direction)
engine
The steering wheel is fully turned ON
EC-211
Wiring Diagram EBS00TS2
HEC748
EC-212
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
NO. R
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
Power steering oil pressure ● Steering wheel is fully turned
30 PU/W
switch [Engine is running]
Approximately 5V
● Steering wheel is not turned
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TS4
EC
1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Check “PW/ST SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
Conditions PW/ST SIGNAL
Steering is neutral position OFF
Steering is turned ON
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0304E

Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
Conditions Voltage
Steering is neutral position Approximately 5V
Steering is turned Approximately 0V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB1744E
EC-213
4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between power steering oil pressure switch terminal 2 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 30 and power steering oil pressure switch terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace power steering oil pressure switch.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TS5
POWER STEERING OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

1. Disconnect power steering oil pressure switch harness connec-
tor then start engine.
2. Check continuity between power steering oil pressure switch ter-
minals 1 and 2.
Steering wheel is being fully turned. Yes
Steering wheel is not being turned. No
3. If NG, replace power steering oil pressure switch. JEF137Y
EC-214
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136
Description EBS00TS6
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the

air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
JEF147Y
EC
SEF099X
EC-215
Wiring Diagram EBS00TS7
GEC457A
EC-216
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
NO. R
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
● Air conditioner switch is ON 1.0 - 4.0V
Refrigerant pressure sen- (Compressor operates)
58 R/L
sor
[Engine is running] Voltage is decreasing EC
● Air conditioner switch is turned from ON to OFF gradually
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TS9
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON.
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1745E
EC-217
2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
JEF147Y
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SEF479Y

● Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
4. Check harness continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 48, TCM ter-
minal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
EC-218
● Harness for open or short between TCM (Transmission control module) and refrigerant pressure sensor
6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 58 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

8. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to “Refrigerant Pressure Sensor”, HA-186.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-219
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TSA

Rear window defogger is operating
ON
and/or lighting switch is on.
Rear window defogger is not oper-
OFF
ating and lighting switch is not on.
Heater fan motor is operating. ON
HEATER FAN SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Heater fan motor is not operating. OFF
EC-220
Wiring Diagram EBS00TSB
EC
GEC483A
EC-221
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
NO. R
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Rear window defogger is operating and/or lighting (11 - 14V)
Electric load signal switch is on
67 R/W
(Load switch) [Engine is running]
● Rear window defogger is not operating and lighting Approximately 0V
switch is not on
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Heater fan motor is operating
68 LG/B Heater fan motor switch
[Engine is running]
Approximately 5V
● Heater fan motor is not operating
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TSD
LOAD SIGNAL
1. CHECK CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

Condition Voltage
Rear window defogger
BATTERY VOLTAGE
switch ON
Rear window defogger
0V
switch OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1746E
NG >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II

Check voltage between ECM terminal 67 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
Condition Voltage
Lighting switch ON BATTERY VOLTAGE
Lighting switch OFF 0V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 10.
PBIB1746E
EC-222
3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn ON the rear window defogger switch.
3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Refer to “REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER”, EL-146.
4. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Stop engine.
2. Turn OFF the rear window defogger switch.
3. Disconnect rear window defogger relay. EC
4. Check voltage between rear window defogger relay terminal 5
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0645E

Check to following.
● 20A fuse
● Fuse block (J/B) connectors M1, E104, B4
● Harness for open and short between fuse block and rear window defogger relay
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
6. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace rear window defogger relay.
EC-223
7. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 67 and rear window defogger relay terminals 3.
PBIB1748E
CONDITION CONTINUITY
1 Should exist.
2 Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.

● Diode M68
● Joint connector-1
● Harness for open and short between ECM and rear window defogger relay

>> INSPECTION END
10. CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION

1. Start engine.
2. Turn the lighting switch ON.
3. Check that headlamps are illuminated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Refer to “HEADLAMP”, EL-34.
EC-224
11. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect lighting switch connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 67 and lighting switch connector terminal 12 under the
EC
PBIB1806E
1 Should exist.
2 Should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 12.

● Diode M68
● Joint connector-1
● Fuse block (J/B) connectors M1, E104, B4
● Harness for open and short between ECM and lighting switch connector

>> INSPECTION END
EC-225
HEATER CONTROL PANEL (FAN SWITCH)
1. CHECK CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION

1. Start engine.
2. Turn fan switch ON.
Condition Voltage
Heater fan motor switch ON 0V
Heater fan motor switch OFF Approximately 5V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1747E

1. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect fan switch harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 68 and fan switch terminal 14.
OK or NG
OK >> Refer to “Blower Motor”, HA-171.
NG >> GO TO 3.

● Harness for open and short between ECM and fan switch
Component Inspection EBS00TSF
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY

1. Check continuity between rear window defogger relay terminals
3 and 5.
PBIB0098E
EC-226
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814
Wiring Diagram EBS00TSG
EC
GEC459A
EC-227
CO ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR
CO ADJUSTMENT RESISTOR PFP:23719
Wiring Diagram EBS00TSH
GEC460A
EC-228
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950
Description EBS00TSI
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
SEF749T
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The fuel vapor from sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister when the engine is off. The fuel vapor is then
stored in the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister retains the fuel vapor until the EVAP canister is purged by air.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the engine operates, the flow
rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is proportionally regulated as
the air flow increases.
EC-229
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
SEF085Y
EC-230
Component Inspection EBS00TSJ
EVAP CANISTER
Blow air into each of three ports to check that air flows freely.
SEF083Y
FUEL CHECK VALVE

EC
1. Blow air through connector on fuel tank side.
A considerable resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow
should be directed toward the EVAP canister side.
2. Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side.
Air flow should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
3. If fuel check valve is suspected of not properly functioning in
steps 1 and 2 above, replace it.
SEF552Y
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF084Y
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

Pressure: 16.0 - 20.0 kPa (0.16 - 0.20 bar, 0.163 -
0.204 kg/cm2, 2.32 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.5 kPa (−0.060 to −0.035 bar, −
0.061 to −0.036 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.51 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
SEF943S

EVAP VAPOR LINE
Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections, chaf-
ing and deterioration. Refer to EC-230, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING".
EC-231
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810
Description EBS00TSK
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB0492E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection EBS00TSL
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over the valve inlet.
PBIB1589E
EC-232
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277
EC
EC-233
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030
Fuel Pressure EBS00TSM
Fuel pressure at idling Vacuum hose is connected Approximately 235 (2.35, 2.4, 34)
kPa (bar, kg/cm2, psi) Vacuum hose is disconnected Approximately 294 (2.94, 3.0, 43)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing EBS00TSN
QG13DE QG16DE QG18DE

A/T No-lode*1 (in P or N position) 750±50 rpm 750±50 rpm 700±50 rpm
Target idle speed
M/T *1 630±50 rpm 630±50 rpm 630±50 rpm
No-lode (in Neutral position)
A/T In P or N position 6±5° BTDC 6±5° BTDC 6±5° BTDC
Ignition timing
M/T In Neutral position 2±5° BTDC 6±5° BTDC 6±5° BTDC
A/T In P or N position
Air conditioner: ON 800 rpm or more
M/T In Neutral position
Throttle position sensor idle position 0.15 - 0.85V
*: Under the following conditions:
● Electrical load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Mass Air Flow Sensor EBS00TSO
Supply voltage (Heater) V Battery voltage (11 - 14)

Supply voltage (Sensor) V Approximately 5
Output voltage V 1.0 - 1.7*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and idling under no-load.
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EBS00TSQ
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) EBS00TST

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) EBS00TSU

EGRC-Solenoid Valve (QG16DE and QG18DE Engine Models) EBS00TSV
Resistance Ω [at 20°C (68°F)] 31 - 35
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Valve EBS00TTY
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] Ω 31 - 35
IACV-AAC Valve EBS00TTZ
Terminal No. Resistance Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]

1-2
2-3
20 - 24
4-5
5-6
EC-234
Injector EBS00TSW
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 13.5 - 17.5
Ignition Coil with Power Transistor EBS00TU0

3 (+) - 2 (−) Except 0 or ∞
1 (+) - 3 (−)
Except 0
1 (+) - 2 (−)
Condenser EBS00TU1
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] MΩ Above 1
Fuel Pump EBS00TSX

EC
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Ω 0.2 - 5.0
EC-235
INDEX FOR DTC
[Electric Throttle Control]
INDEX FOR DTC PFP:00024
Alphabetical Index EBS00TF9
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-327, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE".
Items DTC*1 MIL light-

Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) ing up
CONSULT-II ECM*2
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2122 2122 1 × EC-479
APP SEN 1/CIRC P2123 2123 1 × EC-479
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2127 2127 1 × EC-486
APP SEN 2/CIRC P2128 2128 1 × EC-486
APP SENSOR P2138 2138 1 × EC-499
ASCD BRAKE SW P1572 1572 1 — EC-462
ASCD SW P1564 1564 1 — EC-455
ASCD VHL SPD SEN P1574 1574 1 — EC-470
BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT P1805 1805 1 × EC-472
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1000 1000*4 2 — EC-327
CAN COMM CIRCUIT U1001 1001*4 2 — EC-327

CKP SEN/CIRCUIT P0335 0335 2 × EC-369
CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 P0340 0340 2 × EC-376
CTP LEARNING P1225 1225 2 — EC-447
CTP LEARNING P1226 1226 2 — EC-449
ECM P0605 0605 1 or 2 × or — EC-401
ECM BACK UP/CIRC P1065 1065 2 × EC-404
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0117 0117 2 × EC-336
ECT SEN/CIRCUIT P0118 0118 2 × EC-336
ENG OVER TEMP P1217 1217 1 × EC-433
ETC ACTR P1121 1121 1 × EC-413
ETC FUNCTION/CIRC P1122 1122 1 × EC-415
ETC MOT P1128 1128 1 × EC-428
ETC MOT PWR P1124 1124 1 × EC-422
ETC MOT PWR P1126 1126 1 × EC-422
HO2S1 (B1) P0132 0132 2 × EC-347
HO2S1 (B1) P0134 0134 2 × EC-353
IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY P0350 0350 2 × EC-383
INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 P1111 1111 2 × EC-408
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0327 0327 2 — EC-365
KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 P0328 0328 2 — EC-365
NATS MALFUNCTION P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 2 — EC-266
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING No DTC Flashing*3 — Flashing*3 EC-268
MAY BE REQUIRED.
EC-236
INDEX FOR DTC
Items DTC*1 MIL light-

Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) ing up
CONSULT-II ECM*2
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING P0000 0000 — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
PW STP SEN/CIRC P0550 0550 2 × EC-397
SENSOR POWER/CIRC P1229 1229 1 × EC-451
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0222 0222 1 × EC-341
TP SEN 1/CIRC P0223 0223 1 × EC-341
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0122 0122 1 × EC-341
TP SEN 2/CIRC P0123 0123 1 × EC-341
TP SENSOR P2135 2135 1 × EC-493
EC
VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC P0500 0500 2 × EC-395
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*4: The trouble shooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
DTC No. Index EBS00TFA
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
DTC*1 Items MIL lighting

Trip Reference page
CONSULT-II *2 (CONSULT-II screen terms) up
ECM
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
No DTC Flashing*3 FURTHER TESTING — Flashing*3 EC-268
MAY BE REQUIRED.
U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 2 — EC-327
U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 2 — EC-327

NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — — —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-336
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-336
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-341
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-341
P0132 0132 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-347
P0134 0134 HO2S1 (B1) 2 × EC-353
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-341
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-341
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-369
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 2 × EC-376
P0350 0350 IGN SIGNAL-PRIMARY 2 × EC-383
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-395
EC-237
INDEX FOR DTC
DTC*1 Items MIL lighting
Trip Reference page
(CONSULT-II screen terms) up
CONSULT-II ECM*2
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC 2 — EC-397
P0605 0605 ECM 1 or 2 × or — EC-401
P1065 1065 ECM BACK UP/CIRC 2 × EC-404
P1111 1111 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 2 × EC-408
P1121 1121 ETC ACTR 1 × EC-413
P1122 1122 ETC FUNCTION/CIRC 1 × EC-415
P1124 1124 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-422
P1126 1126 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-422
P1128 1128 ETC MOT 1 × EC-428
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP 1 × EC-433
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-447
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING 2 — EC-449
P1229 1229 SENSOR POWER/CIRC 1 × EC-451
P1564 1564 ASCD SW 1 — EC-455
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW 1 — EC-462
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN 1 — EC-470
P1610 - P1615 1610 - 1615 NATS MALFUNCTION 2 — EC-266
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-472
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-479
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-479
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-486
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-486
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR 1 × EC-493
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR 1 × EC-499
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-II.
EC-238
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS PFP:00001
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER” EBS00VY3
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with
a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of
collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL N16 is as follows:
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering
wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), front seat belt
pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
WARNING:
● To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
● Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per- EC
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
● Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harness connec-
tor.
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine EBS00TFC
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator (MIL) to warn the driver
of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
● Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery ground cable before any repair
or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will
cause the MIL to light up.
● Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
● Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to “HARNESS CON-
NECTOR”, EL-6.
● Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness
with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to the short circuit.
● Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM
before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precaution EBS00TFD
● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

● Do not attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
● Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery
ground cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM
because battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition
switch is turned off.
● Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then
disconnect battery ground cable.
SEF289H
EC-239
PRECAUTIONS
● Do not disassemble ECM.
● If battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to
the initial ECM values.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial values.
Engine operation can vary slightly when the cable is dis-
connected. However, this is not an indication of a malfunc-
tion. Do not replace parts because of a slight variation.
PBIB1164E
● When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten it

securely with a lever as far as it will go as shown at right.
PBIB1512E
● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
● Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge)
voltage to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in
damage to ICs.
● Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in)
away from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control sys- PBIB0090E
tem malfunctions due to receiving external noise, degraded

operation of ICs, etc.
● Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.
● Before replacing ECM, perform “ECM Terminals and Refer-
ence Value” inspection and make sure ECM functions prop-
erly. Refer to EC-294, "ECM Terminals and Reference
Value".
● Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
● Do not disassemble mass air flow sensor.
● Do not clean mass air flow sensor with any type of deter-
gent.
● Do not disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
● Even a slight leak in the air intake system can cause seri- MEF040D
ous incidents.
● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), crankshaft position sensor (POS).
EC-240
PRECAUTIONS
● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Overall Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Overall Function
Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
SAT652J
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, connect

a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between
the ECM and ECM harness connector. EC
● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never
allow the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
● Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/
output voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's
transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as
the ground.
SEF348N
● Do not operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.

● Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
PBIB1721E
EC-241
PRECAUTIONS
● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.
● Immediately after starting, do not rev up engine unneces-
sarily.
● Do not rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

to observe the following as it may adversely affect elec-
tronic control systems depending on installation location.
– Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic
control units.
– Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Do not let them run parallel for a long distance.
– Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-
wave radio can be kept smaller.
SEF708Y
– Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
●
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis EBS00TFE
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

● “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”, GI-11
● “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”, EL-10 for power distribution circuit
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
● “How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnoses”, GI-32
● “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSES FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, GI-21
EC-242
PREPARATION
PREPARATION PFP:00002
Special Service Tools EBS00TFF
Tool number
Description
Tool name
KV10117100 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors
Heated oxygen sensor with 22 mm (0.87 in) hexagon nut
wrench
S-NT379
KV10114400 Loosening or tightening heated oxygen sensors

Heated oxygen sensor a: 22 mm (0.87 in)
wrench EC
S-NT636
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap and

radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
EG17650301
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
Radiator cap tester
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
adapter
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564
KV109E0010 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester

Break-out box
S-NT825
KV109E0080 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester

Y-cable adapter
S-NT826
EC-243
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools EBS00TFG
Tool name Description

Fuel filler cap adapter Checking fuel tank vacuum relief valve opening
pressure
S-NT653
Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tempera-

ture sensor
S-NT705
Oxygen sensor Reconditioning the exhaust system threads before

thread cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-seize
lubricant shown below.
a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant Lubricating oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

(PermatexTM 133AR when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
or equivalent meeting
MIL specification MIL-
A-907)
S-NT779
EC-244
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM PFP:23710
System Diagram - QG13DE Engine Models EBS00TFH
EC
PBIB1750E
EC-245
System Diagram - QG16DE and QG18DE Engine Models EBS00TFI
PBIB1751E
EC-246
Vacuum Hose Drawing EBS00TFJ
EC
MBIB0013E
Refer to EC-245, "System Diagram - QG13DE Engine Models" or EC-246, "System Diagram - QG16DE
and QG18DE Engine Models" for Vacuum Control System.
EC-247
System Chart EBS00TFK
Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)

● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel injection & mixture ratio control Fuel injectors
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic ignition system Power transistor
● Mass air flow sensor Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
On board diagnostic system MIL (On the instrument panel)*2
● Heated oxygen sensor 1
● Throttle position sensor Intake valve timing control solenoid
Intake valve timing control
● Accelerator pedal position sensor valve*3
● Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater control Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
● Intake air temperature sensor EVAP canister purge volume control
EVAP canister purge flow control
● Power steering pressure sensor solenoid valve
● Ignition switch Air conditioning cut control Air conditioner relay
● Stop lamp switch
● Battery voltage
● Knock sensor
● Refrigerant pressure sensor
● TCM (Transmission control module)*1
Cooling fan control Cooling fan relays
● Air conditioner switch
● Vehicle speed signal*1
● Electrical load signal
● ASCD steering switch
● ASCD brake switch
*1: This input signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
*2: This output signal is sent from the ECM through CAN communication line.
*3: For QG16DE and QG18DE engine models
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System EBS00TFL

Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
Engine speed*2 and piston position
Heated oxygen sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Fuel injection & mix-
Fuel injectors
ture ratio control
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Battery Battery voltage*2
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
*1 Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed signal
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner operation
*2: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
EC-248
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
● During warm-up
● Hot-engine operation
● When selector lever is changed from N to D (A/T models)
<Fuel decrease> EC
● During deceleration
● During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
PBIB0121E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can then better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses
heated oxygen sensor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor if the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM
adjusts the injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about heated
oxygen sensor 1, refer to EC-353. This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-
fuel mixture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
● Deceleration and acceleration
● Malfunction of heated oxygen sensor 1 or its circuit
● Insufficient activation of heated oxygen sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
● High engine coolant temperature
● During warm-up
● After shifting from N to D (A/T models)
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from heated oxygen
sensor 1. This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to
the theoretical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as orig-
inally designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot film) and characteristic changes
during operation (i.e., injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio.
EC-249
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes short term fuel trim and long term fuel trim.
“Short term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from heated oxygen sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared
to the theoretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an
increase in fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out long-term to compensate for continual deviation
of the short term fuel trim from the central value. Such deviation will occur due to individual engine differences,
wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING
SEF337W
Two types of systems are used.

Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the firing order. This system is used
when the engine is running.
Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all four cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM.
The four injectors will then receive the signals two times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration or operation of the engine at excessively high speeds.
Electronic Ignition (EI) System EBS00TFM

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2 and piston position

Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Ignition timing control Power transistor
Knock sensor Engine knocking

Vehicle speed signal*1 Vehicle speed

EC-250
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-
fuel ratio for every running condition of the engine. The ignition tim-
ing data is stored in the ECM. This data forms the map shown.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and
camshaft position sensor signal. Computing this information, ignition
signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
e.g., N: 1,800 rpm, Tp: 1.50 msec
A °BTDC
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the
ECM according to the other data stored in the ECM.
● At starting SEF742M
● During warm-up
● At idle
● At low battery voltage EC
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not
operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition.
Air Conditioning Cut Control EBS00TFN

Air conditioner switch Air conditioner ON signal
Throttle position sensor Throttle valve opening angle
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Air conditioner

Air conditioner relay
cut control
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
*1 Vehicle speed
Vehicle speed signal
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used.
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned off.
● When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
● When cranking the engine.
● At high engine speeds.
● When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
● When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
● When engine speed is excessively low.
● When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.
EC-251
Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed) EBS00TFO

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Neutral position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature Fuel cut control Fuel injectors

Engine speed

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
If the engine speed is above 3,950 rpm with no load (for example, in neutral and engine speed over 3,950
rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off varies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will operate until the engine speed reaches 1,500 rpm, then fuel cut is cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under “Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System”, EC-
248.
CAN Communication EBS00TFP
SYSTEM DISCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAM COMMUNICATION UNIT
Go to CAN system, when selecting your car model from the following table.
Body type Sedan
Axle 2WD
QG13DE/QG16DE/QG18DE
Engine
(Electric throttle control)
Transmission A/T M/T
CAN communication unit
ECM × ×
TCM ×
Combination meter × ×
CAN communication type EC-253 EC-253
×: Applicable
EC-252
A/T Models
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
SEL684Y
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALCHART
T: Transmit R: Receive EC
Signals ECM TCM Combination meter
Output shaft revolution signal R T
Closed throttle position signal T R
Wide open throttle position signal T R
T R
Engine and A/T integrated control signal
R T
Stop lamp switch signal R T
A/T position indicator signal T R
1 R T
Overdrive control switch signal*
A/T check switch signal*2 R T
O/D OFF indicator signal*1 T R
A/T CHECK indicator signal*2 T R

Engine speed signal T R
Engine coolant temperature signal T R
Vehicle speed signal R T
Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R
ASCD SET lamp signal T R
ASCD CRUISE lamp signal T R
ASCD operation signal T R
ASCD OD cancel request T R
*1: With overdrive control switch
*2: Without overdrive control switch
M/T Models
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
SEL681Y

EC-253
T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals ECM Combination meter
Engine speed signal T R
Engine coolant temperature signal T R
Vehicle speed signal R T
Malfunction indicator lamp signal T R
EC-254
BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE PFP:00018
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check EBS00TFQ
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
EC
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
Check the idle speed by installing the pulse type tachometer clamp on the loop wire or on suitable high-tension
wire which is installed between No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug.
NOTE:
For the method of installing the tachometer, refer to EC-255, "IGNITION TIMING".
IGNITION TIMING
Any of following two methods may be used.
Method A
1. Slide the harness protector of ignition coil No. to clear the wires.
2. Attach timing light to the loop wires as shown.
PBIB1691E
Method B
1. Remove No. 1 ignition coil.
PBIB1692E
EC-255
2. Connect No. 1 ignition coil and No. 1 spark plug with suitable
high-tension wire as shown, and attach timing light clamp to this
wire.
PBIB1693E
SEF166Y
PBIB1694E
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning EBS00TFR
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of the accel-
erator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time
harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning EBS00TFS
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the throttle valve by
monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connector of
electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
EC-256
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Idle Air Volume Learning EBS00TFT
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within the specific
range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
● Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
● Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
● Battery voltage: More than 12.9V (At idle)
● PNP switch: ON EC
● Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, headlamp, rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
● Vehicle speed: Stopped
● Transmission: Warmed-up
For A/T models with CONSULT-II, drive vehicle until “FLUID TEMP SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “A/
T” system indicates less than 0.9V.
For A/T models without CONSULT-II and M/T models, drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-256, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning".
2. Perform EC-256, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
5. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
SEF217Z
6. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
SEF454Y
EC-257
7. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If
“CMPLT” is not displayed, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be
carried out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the inci-
dent by referring to the Diagnostic Procedure below.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle
speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
M/T 680±50 rpm 2±5° BTDC
QG13DE
A/T 750±50 rpm 6±5° BTDC MBIB0238E
M/T 630±50 rpm 8±5° BTDC

QG16DE
A/T 750±50 rpm 10±5° BTDC
M/T 630±50 rpm 8±5° BTDC
QG18DE
A/T 700±50 rpm 10±5° BTDC
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops
blinking and turned ON.
9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turned ON.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
SEC897C
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are within the
specifications.
Engine and transmission Idle speed ignition timing

M/T 680±50 rpm 2±5° BTDC
QG13DE
A/T 750±50 rpm 6±5° BTDC
EC-258
Engine and transmission Idle speed ignition timing
M/T 630±50 rpm 8±5° BTDC
QG16DE
A/T 750±50 rpm 10±5° BTDC
M/T 630±50 rpm 8±5° BTDC
QG18DE
A/T 700±50 rpm 10±5° BTDC
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not be carried
out successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the “Diagnostic Procedure”
below.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
2. Check PCV valve operation. EC
3. Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage.
4. When the above three items check out OK, engine component parts and their installation condi-
tion are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of the incident.
It is useful to perform EC-316, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE".
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform “Idle air volume learning” all over again:
– Engine stalls.
– Erroneous idle.
Fuel Pressure Check EBS00TFU
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres-
sure cannot be completely released because N16 electric throttle control type models do not have fuel
return system.
With CONSULT-II
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT”
mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine.
pressure.
SEF214Y
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in fuse box.
2. Start engine.
pressure.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
PBIB1695E
EC-259
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
NOTE:
Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel pres-
sure cannot be completely released because N16 electric throttle control type models do not have fuel
return system.
● When reconnecting fuel line, always use new clamps.
● Make sure that clamp screw does not contact adjacent parts.
● Use a torque driver to tighten clamps.
● Use Pressure Gauge to check fuel pressure.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-259, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".
2. Install the fuel pressure gauge with the fuel pressure check
adapter as shown in the figure.
3. Turn ignition switch ON, and check for fuel leakage.
4. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
5. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa
(3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
6. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
7. Check the following. PBIB1696E
● Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
● Fuel filter for clogging
● Fuel pump
● Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.

If NG, repair or replace.
EC-260
Injector EBS00VYX
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
EC
PBIB1753E
1. Fuel tube 2. Fuel feed hose 3. O-ring

4. Clip 5. Fuel injector 6. Intake manifold
CAUTION:
● Apply new engine oil when installing the parts that specified to do so in the figure.
● Do not remove or disassembly parts unless instructed as shown in the figure.
Removal
1. Release fuel pressure. Refer to EC-259, "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE".
2. Disconnect harness for fuel injector, and move it aside.
3. Remove fuel hose.
CAUTION:
After removal, install blind plug to fuel hose to prevent the fuel from draining.
4. Remove fuel tube and injector assembly with the following pro-
cedure:
a. Loosen mounting bolts in reverse order shown in figure.
PBIC0617E
b. Pull out fuel injector/fuel tube assembly toward engine rear side.
CAUTION:
Do not touch fuel injector nozzle with intake manifold or other parts.
EC-261
5. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube.
● Release clip and remove it.
● Pull fuel injector straight out of fuel tube.
CAUTION:
● Be careful not to damage nozzle part.
● Avoid any impact such as a dropping.
● Do not disassemble or adjust it.
PBIC0620E
Installation
1. When installing O-ring to fuel injector, follow instructions described below.
CAUTION:
● Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves.
● Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
● Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
● Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
● Be careful not to scratch it with a tool or fingernails during installation. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring is stretched while being attached, do not insert it into fuel tube
immediately.
● Insert O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not angle or twist it.
2. Install fuel injector to fuel tube with the following procedure.

a. Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector.
● Insert clip so that lug A of fuel injector matches notch A of the
clip.
CAUTION:
● Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one.
● Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If

interference occurs, replace O-ring.
b. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached.
● Insert it while matching it to the axial center.
● Insert fuel injector so that lug B of fuel tube matches notch B

of the clip.
● Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fix-
ing groove on clip.
c. Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel
injector does not rotate or come off.
PBIC1021E
3. Tighten mounting bolts in two steps in numerical order shown in

figure.
1st step: 11.8 - 13.8 N·m (1.2 - 1.4 kg-m, 9 - 10 ft-lb)
2nd step: 20.8 - 28.2 N·m (2.1 - 2.8 kg-m, 16 - 20 ft-lb)
4. Install fuel feed hose.
CAUTION:
Install hose clamp avoiding interference with bulge, and
securely tighten it
5. Install remaining parts in the reverse order of removal. PBIC0617E
EC-262
Inspection After Installation
● Check for fuel leakage with following procedure.
1. Turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine), and check connections for leakage by applying fuel pressure
to fuel piping.
2. Start engine, and re-check connections for fuel leakage by increasing engine speed.
EC
EC-263
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM PFP:00028
Introduction EBS00TFV
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Freeze Frame data
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
1st trip Freeze Frame
DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data
data
CONSULT-II × × × ×
ECM × ×*1 — —
*1: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator (MIL) on the instrument panel lights up when the same malfunction is detected in
two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to EC-276.)
Two Trip Detection Logic EBS00TFW
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not light up at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL lights up. The MIL lights up at the same time when the DTC is stored. <2nd
trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. When the ECM enters fail-safe mode (Refer to EC-276.), the DTC is stored in the
ECM memory even in the 1st trip.
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has trouble and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the trouble.
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode Engine speed will not rise more than 2,500 rpm due to the fuel cut
Emission-related Diagnostic Information EBS00TFX
DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not reoccur, the 1st trip
DTC will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
light up (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL lights up when the same malfunction occurs in two consec-
utive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For fail-safe items, the DTC is stored in the ECM memory
even in the 1st trip.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in EC-265, "HOW
TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step II, refer to EC-272. Then perform DTC Confirmation Procedure
or Overall Function Check to try to duplicate the problem. If the malfunction is duplicated, the item requires
repair.
EC-264
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II displays the DTC in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode. Examples: P0117, P0340, P1065, etc.
(CONSULT-II also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
Without CONSULT-II
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0117, 0340 1065 etc.
● 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
● Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, the Diagnostic Test Mode II does not indicate
whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal.
CONSULT-II can identify malfunction status as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT-II (if avail-
able) is recommended.
A sample of CONSULT-II display for DTC and 1st trip DTC is shown below. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunc-
tion is displayed in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CONSULT-II. Time data indicates how many EC
times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be 0.
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
PBIB0911E
FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA

The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, base fuel schedule and intake
air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-II. For
details, see EC-304.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in EC-265, "HOW TO ERASE EMIS-
SION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION
How to Erase DTC
WITH CONSULT-II
The emission related diagnostic information in the ECM can be erased by selecting “ERASE” in the “SELF-
DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
EC-265
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
PBIB0671E
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once.
2. Wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by depressing the accelerator pedal. Refer to
EC-268, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE".
● If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be lost within. 24
hours.
● The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
– Diagnostic trouble codes
– 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
– Freeze frame data
– 1st trip freeze frame data
– Others
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System) EBS00TFY
● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

the “ON” position or “NATS MALFUNCTION” is displayed
on “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” screen, perform self-diagnostic
results mode with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.
Refer to “NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)”, EL-284.
● Confirm no self-diagnostic results of NATS is displayed
before touching “ERASE” in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode
with CONSULT-II.
● When replacing ECM, initialization of NATS system and reg-
istration of all NATS ignition key IDs must be carried out
with CONSULT-II using NATS program card. SEF515Y
Therefore, be sure to receive all keys from vehicle owner.

Regarding the procedures of NATS initialization and NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to
CONSULT-II operation manual, NATS.
EC-266
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) EBS00TFZ
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON with-
out the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not light up, refer to “WARNING LAMPS”, EL-
102 or see EC-568.
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SAT652J
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

EC
The on board diagnostic system has the following four functions.
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function
Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown,
“ON” position open circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not come on, check MIL circuit.
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

WARNING detected twice in two consecutive driving cycles (two trip
detection logic), the MIL will light up to inform the driver
that a malfunction has been detected.
The following malfunctions will light up the MIL in the 1st
trip.
● One trip detection diagnoses
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
“ON” position RESULTS
Engine stopped
Engine running HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 This function allows the fuel mixture condition (lean or
MONITOR rich), monitored by heated oxygen sensor 1, to be read.
When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting up MIL when there is
malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected as
NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has trouble and MIL circuit is open by means
of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands the
driver to repair the trouble.
EC-267
MIL Flashing without DTC
If the ECM is in Diagnostic Test Mode II, MIL may flash when engine is running. In this case, check ECM diag-
nostic test mode. Refer to EC-268, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE".
How to switch the diagnostic test (function) modes, and details of the above functions are described later EC-
268, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE".
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● Others
HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
NOTE:
● It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
● It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
● Always ECM returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after ignition switch is turned OFF.
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)
1. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 10 seconds until the MIL starts
blinking.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
PBIB0092E
How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Monitor)

1. Set the ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-268, "How to Set Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)".
2. Start Engine.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Heated oxygen sensor 1 monitor).
1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to EC-268, "How to Set Diagnostic
Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)".
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK
In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check the bulb. Refer to
“WARNING LAMPS”, EL-102 or see EC-568.
EC-268
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
● These DTC numbers are clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-II. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a
code.
EC
PBIA3905E
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral flashes. The “zero” is indicated
by the number of ten flashes. The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral flashes on and off is 1.2 seconds
consisting of an ON (0.6-second) - OFF (0.6-second) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-second ON and 0.3-second OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-second OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC “0000” refers to no
malfunction. (See EC-236, "INDEX FOR DTC")
The DTC can be erased from the back up memory in the ECM by depressing accelerator pedal. Refer to EC-
268, "HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE".
● If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
● Be careful not to erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 MONITOR
In this mode, the MIL displays the condition of the fuel mixture (lean or rich) which is monitored by the heated
oxygen sensor 1.
MIL Fuel mixture condition in the exhaust gas Air fuel ratio feedback control condition
ON Lean
Closed loop system
OFF Rich
*Remains ON or OFF Any condition Open loop system
EC-269
*: Maintains conditions just before switching to open loop.
To check the heated oxygen sensor 1 function, start engine in the Diagnostic Test Mode II and warm it up until
engine coolant temperature indicator points to the middle of the gauge.
Next run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load conditions. Then make sure that the
MIL comes ON more than 5 times within 10 seconds with engine running at 2,000 rpm under no-load.
EC-270
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS PFP:00004
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction EBS00TG0
INTRODUCTION
The engine has an ECM to control major systems such as fuel con-
trol, ignition control, idle air control system, etc. The ECM accepts
input signals from sensors and instantly drives actuators. It is essen-
tial that both input and output signals are proper and stable. At the
same time, it is important that there are no malfunctions such as vac-
uum leaks, fouled spark plugs, or other malfunctions with the engine.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a incident that occurs intermit-
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent incidents are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case,
careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replace-
ment of good parts.
MEF036D
A visual check only may not find the cause of the incidents. A road EC
test with CONSULT-II or a circuit tester connected should be per-
formed. Follow the Work Flow on EC-272.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a
customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus-
tomer can supply good information about such incidents, especially
intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under
what conditions they occur. A Diagnostic Worksheet like the example
on EC-275 should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” malfunctions first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability malfunctions on an electroni-
cally controlled engine vehicle.
SEF233G
SEF234G
EC-271
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
Flow Chart
PBIB0912E
*1 If time data of “SELF-DIAG *2 If time data of “SELF-DIAG *3 If the on board diagnostic system
RESULTS” is other than 0 or [1t], per- RESULTS” is other than 0 or [1t], per- cannot be performed, check main
form EC-320, "TROUBLE DIAGNO- form EC-320, "TROUBLE DIAGNO- power supply and ground circuit.
SIS FOR INTERMITTENT SIS FOR INTERMITTENT Refer to EC-321, "POWER SUPPLY
INCIDENT". INCIDENT". CIRCUIT FOR ECM".
*4 If the incident cannot be verified, per- *5 EC-316, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS -
form EC-320, "TROUBLE DIAGNO- SPECIFICATION VALUE"
SIS FOR INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT".
EC-272
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Description for Work Flow
STEP DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident/symptom occurred using the
STEP I
DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET, EC-275.
Before confirming the concern, check and write down (print out using CONSULT-II) the (1st trip) DTC and the (1st
trip) freeze frame data, then erase the DTC and the data. (Refer to EC-265, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".) The (1st trip) DTC and the (1st trip) freeze frame data can be used when duplicating
the incident at STEP III & IV.
STEP II
If the incident cannot be verified, perform EC-320, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT".
Study the relationship between the cause, specified by (1st trip) DTC, and the symptom described by the customer.
(The Symptom Matrix Chart will be useful. See EC-284.)
Also check related service bulletins for information.
Try to confirm the symptom and under what conditions the incident occurs.
The DIAGNOSTIC WORK SHEET and the freeze frame data are useful to verify the incident. Connect CONSULT-II
STEP III to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG) mode and check real time diagnosis results.
EC
If the malfunction code is detected, skip STEP IV and perform STEP V.
Try to detect the (1st trip) DTC by driving in (or performing) the DTC Confirmation Procedure. Check and read the (1st
trip) DTC and (1st trip) freeze frame data by using CONSULT-II.
During the (1st trip) DTC verification, be sure to connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle in DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)
mode and check real time diagnosis results.
STEP IV
In case the DTC Confirmation Procedure is not available, perform the Overall Function Check instead. The (1st trip)
DTC cannot be displayed by this check, however, this simplified check is an effective alternative.
The NG result of the Overall Function Check is the same as the (1st trip) DTC detection.
Take the appropriate action based on the results of STEP I through IV.
If the malfunction code is indicated, proceed to TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC PXXXX.
If the normal code is indicated, proceed to the BASIC INSPECTION. (Refer to EC-278.) If COSULT-II is available,
STEP V
perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II and proceed to the EC-316, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS -
SPECIFICATION VALUE". (If malfunction is detected, proceed to “PERAIR/REPLACE”.) Then perform inspections
according to the EC-284, "Symptom Matrix Chart".
Identify where to begin diagnosis based on the relationship study between symptom and possible causes. Inspect the
system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage using (tracing) Harness Layouts.
Gently shake the related connectors, components or wiring harness with CONSULT-II set in “DATA MONITOR
(AUTO TRIG)” mode.
Check the voltage of the related ECM terminals or monitor the output data from the related sensors with CONSULT-II.
Refer to EC-294, EC-311.
STEP VI
The “Diagnostic Procedure” in EC section contains a description based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” in
“HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSES FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, GI-21.
Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
If malfunctioning part cannot be detected, perform EC-320, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCI-
DENT".
Once you have repaired the circuit or replaced a component, you need to run the engine in the same conditions and
circumstances which resulted in the customer's initial complaint.
Perform the DTC Confirmation Procedure and confirm the normal code [DTC No. P0000] is detected. If the incident is
STEP VII still detected in the final check, perform STEP VI by using a method different from the previous one.
Before returning the vehicle to the customer, be sure to erase the unnecessary (already fixed) (1st trip) DTC in ECM
and TCM (Transmission control module). (Refer to EC-265, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC
INFORMATION".)
EC-273
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Description
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a incident. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the one on the next page in order
to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to come on steady or blink and
DTC to be detected. Examples:
● Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire. SEF907L
● Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere.
EC-274
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Worksheet Sample
EC
MTBL0017
DTC Inspection Priority Chart EBS00TG1
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
NOTE:
If DTC U1000 and/or U1001 is displayed with other DTC, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000 and U1001. Refer to EC-327, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE".
EC-275
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Priority Detected items (DTC)
1 ● U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
● P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
● P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor
● P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P1229 P2135 Throttle position sensor
● P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor
● P0327 P0328 Knock sensor
● P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● P0340 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● P0350 ignition signal
● P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
● P0605 ECM
● P1610-P1615 NATS
2 ● P0132 P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1
● P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
● P1111 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
● P1065 ECM power supply
● P1122 Electric throttle control function
● P1124 P1126 P1128 Electric throttle control actuator
● P1805 Brake switch
3 ● P1121 Electric throttle control actuator
● P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
● P1564 ASCD steering switch
● P1572 ASCD brake switch
● P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
Fail-safe Chart EBS00TG2
● When the DTC listed below is detected, the ECM enters the fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning
P0118 ture sensor circuit ignition switch ON or START.
Engine coolant temperature decided (CONSULT-
Condition
II display)
Just as ignition switch is turned
40°C (104°F)
ON or Start
More than approx. 4 minutes after
80°C (176°F)
ignition ON or Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cool-
ing fan operates while engine is running.
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P0123 in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the nor-
P0223 mal condition.
P2135 So, the acceleration will be poor.
EC-276
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
P1121 Electric throttle control actu- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return
ator spring malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to
20 degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops,
the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm
or more.
P1122 Electric throttle control func- ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
tion fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
EC
P1124 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1126 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1128 Throttle control motor
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P1229 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening
P2123 sensor in order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2127 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the nor-
P2128 mal condition.
P2138 So, the acceleration will be poor.
● When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM can not warn the driver by lighting up MIL when
there is malfunction on engine control system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related diagnoses are continuously detected
as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the driver that engine control system has trouble and MIL circuit is open by
means of operating fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operate when above diagnoses except MIL circuit are detected and demands
the driver to repair the trouble.
EC-277
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Basic Inspection EBS00TG3
1. INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance.
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
– Harness connectors for improper connections
– Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut
– Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
– Hoses and ducts for leaks
– Air cleaner clogging
– Gasket
3. Confirm that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
– Headlamp switch is OFF. SEF983U
– Air conditioner switch is OFF.

– Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
– Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points the middle of gauge.
Ensure engine stays below 1,000 rpm.
SEF976U
5. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-
load.
6. Make sure that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-II or ECM.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
SEF977U
2. REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 3.
EC-278
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-
load, then run engine at idle speed for about 1 minute.
SEF978U
EC
3. Read idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.

Idle speed
Engine and transmission type
(in P or N position)
M/T 680±50 rpm
QG13DE
A/T 750±50 rpm
M/T 630±50 rpm
QG16DE
A/T 750±50 rpm
M/T 630±50 rpm
QG18DE
SEF058Y
A/T 700±50 rpm
Without CONSULT-II
1. Run engine at about 2,000 rpm for about 2 minutes under no-load.
2. Rev engine (2,000 to 3,000 rpm) two or three times under no-load, then run engine at idle speed for about
1 minute.
Idle speed
M/T 680±50 rpm
QG13DE
A/T 750±50 rpm
M/T 630±50 rpm
QG16DE
A/T 750±50 rpm
M/T 630±50 rpm
QG18DE
A/T 700±50 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 4.
4. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 5.
EC-279
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-256, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
>> GO TO 6.

Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 7.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
Idle speed
M/T 680±50 rpm
QG13DE
A/T 750±50 rpm
M/T 630±50 rpm
QG16DE
A/T 750±50 rpm
M/T 630±50 rpm
QG18DE
A/T 700±50 rpm
Without CONSULT-II
Idle speed
M/T 680±50 rpm
QG13DE
A/T 750±50 rpm
M/T 630±50 rpm
QG16DE
A/T 750±50 rpm
M/T 630±50 rpm
QG18DE
A/T 700±50 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 8.
EC-280
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-376.
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-369.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
2. GO TO 4.

this is the rarely the case.)
EC
>> GO TO 4.

1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Ignition timing
M/T 2±5° BTDC
QG13DE
A/T 6±5° BTDC
M/T 8±5° BTDC
QG16DE
A/T 10±5° BTDC
M/T 8±5° BTDC
QG18DE
PBIB1694E
A/T 10±5° BTDC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 11.
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
>> GO TO 12.
12. PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

Perform EC-256, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning".
>> GO TO 13.
EC-281
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 14.
No >> 1. Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning.
2. GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
Idle speed
M/T 680±50 rpm
QG13DE
A/T 750±50 rpm
M/T 630±50 rpm
QG16DE
A/T 750±50 rpm
M/T 630±50 rpm
QG18DE
A/T 700±50 rpm
Without CONSULT-II
Idle speed
M/T 680±50 rpm
QG13DE
A/T 750±50 rpm
M/T 630±50 rpm
QG16DE
A/T 750±50 rpm
M/T 630±50 rpm
QG18DE
A/T 700±50 rpm
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 17.
EC-282
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
15. CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Ignition timing
M/T 2±5° BTDC
QG13DE
A/T 6±5° BTDC
M/T 8±5° BTDC
QG16DE
A/T 10±5° BTDC
M/T 8±5° BTDC
QG18DE
PBIB1694E
A/T 10±5° BTDC
EC
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 16.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
2. GO TO 4.

● Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-376.
● Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-369.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 18.
2. GO TO 4.

this is the rarely the case.)
>> GO TO 4.
EC-283
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Matrix Chart EBS00TG4
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-539
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-259
Injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-533
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-570
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-573
tem
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 EC-255
EC-413,
EC-415,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-422,
EC-428
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-255
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-383
Main power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-321
Mass air flow sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-330
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 1 1 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 EC-336
EC-341,
EC-359,
EC-447,
Throttle position sensor circuit 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-449,
EC-451,
EC-493
EC-479,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1 2 2 EC-486,
EC-499
EC-347,
Heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-353,
EC-515
Knock sensor circuit 2 2 3 EC-365
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-369
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 2 2 EC-376
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-395
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 3 EC-397
EC-284
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
EC

EC-401,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-404
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-408
cuit (QG16DE and QG18DE engine models)
PNP switch circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 EC-529
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 3 3 4 EC-546
Electrical load signal circuit 3 3 3 3 EC-551
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 HA section
EC-285
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Fuel Fuel tank FE section
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5
Vapor lock
5
Valve deposit
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gaso- 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
line, Low octane)
—
Air Air duct
Air cleaner
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor —electric
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM section
Air leakage from intake manifold/
—
Collector/Gasket
Cranking Battery
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Alternator circuit —
Starter circuit 3
Signal plate/Flywheel/Drive plate 6 EM section
PNP switch AT or MT
4
section
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
EM section
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
EC-286
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
EC

Valve Timing chain
mecha-
Camshaft
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM section
Intake valve
3
Exhaust valve
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 FE section
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil MA, EM
tion filter/Oil gallery and LC
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 section
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil
Cooling Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
Thermostat 5
LC section
Water pump
Water gallery 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 5
Cooling fan 5
Coolant level (low)/Contaminated
MA section
coolant
EC-266 or
NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) 1 1
EL section
EC-287
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Engine Control Component Parts Location EBS00TG5
PBIB1728E
EC-288
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
PBIB1729E
EC-289
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PBIB1730E
EC-290
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
PBIB1731E
EC-291
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram EBS00TG6
GEC396A
EC-292
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
GEC397A
EC-293
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout EBS00TG7
MBIB0045E
ECM Terminals and Reference Value EBS00TG8
PREPARATION
1. ECM is located behind in the left side of the cowl top (behind the strut tower).
For this inspection.
2. Remove ECM harness protector.
PBIB1697E
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with

levers as far as they will go as shown at right.
4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST)
between the ECM and ECM harness connector.
● Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
● Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
PBIB1512E
ECM INSPECTION TABLE

Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
1 B ECM ground Engine ground
● Idle speed
Throttle control motor power BATTERY VOLTAGE
3 R [Ignition switch ON]
supply (11 - 14V)
EC-294
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor
4 BR ● Gear position is 1st (M/T models)
(Close)
● Gear position is D (A/T models)
● Accelerator pedal is releasing
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V
● Engine stopped
Throttle control motor EC
5 Y ● Gear position is 1st (M/T models)
(Open)
● Accelerator pedal is depressing
PBIB1105E
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.0V
Power steering pressure ● Steering wheel is being turned
12 W
sensor [Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel is not being turned
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
13*1 Crankshaft position sensor PBIB0527E

R
(14)*2 (POS)
Approximately 3.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0528E
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
14*1 Camshaft position sensor PBIB0525E
*2
R
(13) (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is 2,000 rpm.
PBIB0526E
EC-295
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EVAP canister purge

PBIB0050E
19 GY/L volume control solenoid
valve
Approximately 10V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm (More
than 100 seconds after starting engine)
PBIB0520E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
22 G/B Injector No. 3

PBIB0529E
23 R/B Injector No. 1
41 L/B Injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
PBIB0530E
Approximately 7.0V
[Engine is running]
● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
Heated oxygen sensor 1
24 G
heater
PBIB0519E
[Ignition switch “ON”]

● Engine stopped. BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
Camshaft position sensor [Engine is running]

29 B Approximately 0V
(PHASE) ground ● Idle speed
Camshaft position sensor [Engine is running]

(POS) ground ● Idle speed
EC-296
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Intake air temperature
34 BR [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
sensor
air temperature.
[Engine is running]
0 - Approximately 1.0V
35 W Heated oxygen sensor 1 ● Warm-up condition
(Periodically change)
Sensor power supply
46 R (Refrigerant pressure [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
Sensor power supply
47 G [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5V
(Throttle position sensor)
EC
● Engine stopped
● Gear position is 1st (M/T models) More than 0.36V
● Accelerator pedal fully released
49 W Throttle position sensor 1
● Engine stopped
● Gear position is 1st (M/T models) Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
50 Y Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground [Engine is running]

54 — Approximately 0V
(Knock sensor shield circuit) ● Idle speed
Sensors' ground
(Power steering pressure [Engine is running]
57 B sensor/Refrigerant pressure ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor/ASCD steering ● Idle speed
switch)
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
60 L/R Ignition signal No. 3

61 BR Ignition signal No. 1 PBIB0521E
79 GY/R Ignition signal No. 4

0 - 0.2V
80 PU Ignition signal No. 2
[Engine is running]
PBIB0522E
EC-297
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
7 - 10V
Intake valve timing control
62 Y/R [Engine is running]
solenoid valve
● When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
quickly
PBIB1790E
Sensor power supply

65 G (Power steering pressure [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5V
sensor)
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Mass air flow sensor)
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
● Gear position is 1st (M/T models) Less than 4.75V
68 R Throttle position sensor 2
● Engine stopped
● Gear position is 1st (M/T models) More than 0.36V
[Engine is running]
69 R/L Refrigerant pressure sensor ● Both A/C switch and blower switch are 1.0 - 4.0V
ON
Engine coolant temperature
72 BR/W [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
sensor
coolant temperature.

73 B (Engine coolant temperature ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor
ground
● Idle speed

75 R (Intake air temperature sen- ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sor ● Idle speed.
EC-298
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

82 B (Accelerator pedal position ● Warm-up condition Approximately 0V
sensor 1) ● Idle speed

Electrical load signal ● Lighting switch is 2ND position (11 - 14V)
84 R/W
(Headlamp signal) [Ignition switch ON]
Approximately 0V
● Lighting switch is OFF
EC
85 LG DATA link connector
● CONSULT-II is disconnected. (11 - 14V)
86 R CAN communication line [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 2.3V

Cooling fan relay ● Cooling fan is not operating. (11 - 14V)
89 LG/B
(High) [Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
● Cooling fan is high speed operating.
Sensor power supply
90 R (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5V
sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
91 G (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5V
sensor 2)
Electrical load signal ● Rear window defogger switch is ON. (11 - 14V)
93 L/R (Rear window defogger sig-
nal) [Ignition switch ON]
Approximately 0V
● Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
94 L CAN communication line [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 2.8V
[ignition switch ON] VATTERY VOLTAGE
● Heater fan control switch is ON. (11 - 14V)
96 LG/B Heater fan switch signal
Approximately 0V
● Heater fan control switch is OFF.
Cooling fan relay ● Cooling fan is not operating. (11 - 14V)
97 LG/R
(Low) [Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
● Cooling fan is operating.
● Engine stopped 0.15 - 0.6V
Accelerator pedal position ● Accelerator pedal fully released
98 LG
sensor 2 [Ignition switch ON]
EC-299
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 4.0V
● ASCD steering switch is OFF.
Approximately 0V
● CRUISE switch is ON.
99 G/Y ASCD steering switch Approximately 1V
● CANCEL switch is ON.
Approximately 2V
● COAST/SET switch is ON.
Approximately 3V
● ACCEL/RESUME switch is ON.
[Ignition switch OFF]
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully released
101 R/G Stop lamp switch
[Ignition switch OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal fully depressed (11 - 14V)

● Gear position is Neutral (M/T models) Approximately 0V
102 G/OR PNP switch ● Gear position is P or N (A/T models)
Approximately 5V
● Except the above gear position
BATTERY VOLTAGE
104 OR Throttle control motor relay (11 - 14V)
[Ignition switch ON] 0 - 1.0V
[Engine is running]
● Both A/C switch and blower switch are 0 - 1.0V
105 Air conditioner relay ON (Compressor operates).
● A/C switch is OFF. (11 - 14V)

106 L
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal is depressed
108 G/B ASCD brake switch
● Brake pedal is fully released (11 - 14V)

(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Both A/C switch and blower switch are Approximately 0V
110 LG/B Air conditioner switch signal ON.
● A/C switch is OFF. (11 - 14V)
EC-300
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
● For a 4 seconds after turning ignition
111 W/G ECM relay (Self shut-off) switch OFF
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a 4 seconds passed after turn- (11 - 14V)
ing ignition switch OFF
● For 1 second after turning ignition switch
0 - 1.0V
ON
*1
B/P Fuel pump relay
(114)*2 EC
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 second after turning ignition (11 - 14V)
switch ON.

116 B ● Idle speed
120 W (11 - 14V)
(Buck-up) (11 - 14V)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*1: Without NATS.
*2: With NATS.
CONSULT-II Function EBS00TG9
FUNCTION
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the
Work support
indications on the CONSULT-II unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self-diagnostic results
can be read and erased quickly.*1
Data monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Input/Output of the specification for Basic fuel schedule, AFM, A/F feedback control value and the
Data monitor (SPEC)
other data monitor items can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the ECMs and also
Active test
shifts some parameters in a specified range.
Function test This mode is used to inform customers when their vehicle condition requires periodic maintenance.
ECM part number ECM part number can be read.
*1: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
● 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
● 1st trip freeze frame data
● Others
EC-301
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC
RESULTS DATA
Item DATA
WORK MONI- ACTIVE
FREEZE MONI-
SUPPORT TOR TEST
DTC *1 FRAME TOR
(SPEC)
DATA*2
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × ×

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × ×
Mass air flow sensor × × ×
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 1 × × ×
Vehicle speed signal × × × ×
Accelerator pedal position sensor × × ×
Throttle position sensor × × ×
Intake air temperature sensor × ×
Knock sensor ×
INPUT
Refrigerant pressure sensor × ×

ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Closed throttle position switch (accelerator

× ×
pedal position sensor signal)
Air conditioner switch × ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch × ×
Stop lamp switch × × ×
Power steering pressure sensor × × ×
Battery voltage × ×
Electrical load signal × ×
ASCD steering switch × × ×
ASCD brake switch × × ×
Injectors × × ×
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × × × ×
Throttle control motor relay × × ×
Throttle control motor ×
OUTPUT
EVAP canister purge volume control sole-

× × ×
noid valve
Air conditioner relay × ×
Fuel pump relay × × × ×
Cooling fan relay × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater × ×
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve × × × ×
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-II screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-304.
*3: Models for QG16DE and QG18DE engine.
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE

EC-302
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. Connect “CONSULT-II” to data link connector, which is located
under the driver’s side dash panel.
PBIB1698E
4. Touch “START”.
EC
PBR455D
SEF995X
6. Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
SEF838Z
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE ● FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure
ING IDLING. from fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN ● THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
EC-303
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SELF-LEARNING CONT ● THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing the coefficient of
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- self-learning control value
FICIENT.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* ● IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-236, "INDEX FOR DTC".)
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
Freeze frame data
Description
item*1
DIAG TROUBLE
● The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code, it is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer to
CODE
EC-236, "INDEX FOR DTC".)
[PXXXX]
● “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
● One mode in the following is displayed.
FUEL SYS-B1 “MODE 2”: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
“MODE 3”: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enrichment)
“MODE 4”: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
“MODE 5”: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
COOLANT TEMP [°C]
● The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
● “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
L-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
than short-term fuel trim.
● “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
S-FUEL TRIM-B1 [%] ● The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
schedule.
ENGINE SPEED
● The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[rpm]
VEHICL SPEED [km/
● The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
h] or [mph]
B/FUEL SCHDL
● The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[msec]
INT/A TEMP SE [°C]
● The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
or [°F]
*1: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
EC-304
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item
×: Applicable
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG
Monitored item INPUT
SIG- SUP- Description Remarks
[Unit] SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
● Indicates the engine speed computed speed drops below the idle rpm.
from the signals of the crankshaft posi-
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × ● If the signal is interrupted while the
tion sensor (POS) and camshaft posi-
tion sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal
value may be indicated.
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When the engine is stopped, a
sensor is displayed. certain value is indicated. EC
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor-
rection.
● When the engine is stopped, a
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio certain value is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × feedback correction factor per cycle is ● This data also includes the data
indicated. for the air-fuel ratio learning con-
trol.
● When the engine coolant tempera-
● The engine coolant temperature (deter- ture sensor is open or short-cir-
COOLAN TEMP/S mined by the signal voltage of the cuit, ECM enters fail-safe mode.
× ×
[°C] or [°F] engine coolant temperature sensor) is The engine coolant temperature
displayed. determined by the ECM is dis-
played.
● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
sensor 1 is displayed.
HO2S1 (B1) [V] × ×
● The signal voltage of the heated oxygen
sensor 2 is displayed.
● Display of heated oxygen sensor 1 sig- ● After turning ON the ignition

nal during air-fuel ratio feedback control: switch, “RICH” is displayed until
RICH... means the mixture became air-fuel mixture ratio feedback
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) “rich”, and control is being affected control begins.
× ×
[RICH/LEAN] toward a leaner mixture. ● When the air-fuel ratio feedback is
LEAN... means the mixture became clamped, the value just before the
“lean”, and control is being affected clamping is displayed continu-
toward a rich mixture. ously.
● The vehicle speed computed from the
VHCL SPEED SE
× × vehicle speed signal sent from combina-
[km/h] or [mph]
tion meter is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT ● The power supply voltage of ECM is dis-
× ×
[V] played.
ACCEL SEN 1 [V] × × ● The accelerator pedal position sensor
ACCEL SEN 2 [V] × signal voltage is displayed.
THRTL SEN 1 [V] × × ● The throttle position sensor signal volt-

THRTL SEN 2 [V] × age is displayed.
● The intake air temperature (determined

INT/A TEMP SE
× × by the signal voltage of the intake air
[°C] or [°F]
temperature sensor) is indicated.
EC-305
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG
[Unit] SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the
starter signal computed from the signals ● After starting the engine, [OFF] is
START SIGNAL
× × of the crankshaft position sensor (POS), displayed regardless of the starter
[ON/OFF]
camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and signal.
battery voltage.
● Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] com-
CLSD THL POS
× × puted by ECM according to the acceler-
[ON/OFF]
ator pedal position sensor signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air
AIR COND SIG
× × conditioner switch as determined by the
[ON/OFF]
air conditioner signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
P/N POSI SW
× × park/neutral position (PNP) switch sig-
[ON/OFF]
nal.
● [ON/OFF] condition of the power steer-
PW/ST SIGNAL ing oil pressure switch as determined by
× ×
[ON/OFF] the power steering oil pressure signal is
indicated.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
electrical load signal.
ON... Rear window defogger switch is
LOAD SIGNAL
× × ON and/or lighting switch is in 2nd posi-
[ON/OFF]
tion.
OFF... Both rear window defogger
switch and lighting switch are OFF.
IGNITION SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from igni-
×
[ON/OFF] tion switch.
HEATER FAN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
×
[ON/OFF] heater fan switch signal.
BRAKE SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the
×
[ON/OFF] stop lamp switch signal.
● Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse ● When the engine is stopped, a
INJ PULSE-B1
× width compensated by ECM according certain computed value is indi-
[msec]
to the input signals. cated.
IGN TIMING ● Indicates the ignition timing computed ● When the engine is stopped, a
×
[BTDC] by ECM according to the input signals. certain value is indicated.
● Indicates the EVAP canister purge vol-
ume control solenoid valve control value
PURG VOL C/V computed by the ECM according to the
[%] input signals.
● The opening becomes larger as the
value increases.
INT/V TIM (B1) ● Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft
[°CA] advanced angle.
● The control condition of the intake valve
INT/V SOL (B1) [%] timing control solenoid valve is indi-
cated.
● The air conditioner relay control condi-
AIR COND RLY
× tion (determined by ECM according to
[ON/OFF]
the input signals) is indicated.
● Indicates the fuel pump relay control
FUEL PUMP RLY
× condition determined by ECM according
[ON/OFF]
to the input signals.
EC-306
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG
[Unit] SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
● Indicates the throttle control motor relay
THRTL RELAY
× control condition determined by the
[ON/OFF]
ECM according to the input signals.
● Indicates the condition of the cooling fan
(determined by ECM according to the
COOLING FAN input signals).
[HI/LOW/OFF] HI... High speed operation
LOW... Low speed operation
OFF... Stop
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated
HO2S1 HTR (B1)
oxygen sensor 1 heater determined by EC
[ON/OFF]
VEHICLE SPEED
× vehicle speed signal sent from TCM or
[km/h] or [mph]
combination meter is displayed.
● Display the condition of idle air volume
learning
IDL A/V LEARN YET... Idle air volume learning has not
[YET/CMPLT] been performed yet.
CMPLT... Idle air volume learning has
already been performed successfully.
● Indicates the heated oxygen sensor 1
O2SEN HTR DTY
heater control value computed by the
[%]
AC PRESS SEN ● The signal voltage from the refrigerant
×
[V] pressure sensor is displayed.
VHCL SPEED SE
vehicle speed signal sent from TCM is
[km/h] or [mph]
displayed.
SET VHCL SPD
● The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
MAIN SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] CRUISE switch signal.
CANCEL SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CAN-
[ON/OFF] CEL switch signal.
RESUME/ACC SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] ACCEL/RES switch signal.
SET SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
[ON/OFF] COAST/SET switch signal.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from
BRAKE SW1 SW
ASCD brake switch signal, and ASCD
[ON/OFF]
clutch switch signal (M/T models).
BRAKE SW2 SW ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop
[ON/OFF] lamp switch signal.
● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON... Vehicle speed is maintained at
the ASCD set speed.
VHCL SPD CUT
CUT...Vehicle speed increased to
[NON/CUT]
excessively high compared with the
ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation
is cut off.
EC-307
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN
ECM
MAIN DIAG
[Unit] SIG-
NALS PORT
NALS
MNTR
● Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON... Vehicle speed is maintained at
the ASCD set speed.
LO SPEED CUT
CUT...Vehicle speed decreased to
[NON/CUT]
excessively low compared with the
ASCD set speed, and ASCD operation
is cut off.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
AT OD MONITOR
according to the input signal from the
[ON/OFF]
TCM.
AT OD CANCEL ● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of A/T O/D
[ON/OFF] cancel signal sent from the TCM.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of
CRUISE LAMP
CRUISE lamp determined by the ECM
[ON/OFF]
according to the input signals.
● Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET
SET LAMP
lamp determined by the ECM according
[ON/OFF]
to the input signals.
Voltage [V]
Frequency ● Only “#” is displayed if item is
[msec], [Hz] or [%] unable to be measured.
DUTY-HI ● Voltage, frequency, duty cycle or pulse ● Figures with “#”s are temporary
width measured by the probe. ones. They are the same figures
DUTY-LOW as an actual piece of data which
PLS WIDTH-HI was just previously measured.
PLS WIDTH-LOW
CAN COMM
×
[OK/NG]
CAN CIRC 1
×
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 2
×
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 3
× ● These items are not displayed in
[OK/UNKWN] ● Indicates the communication condition
“SELECTION FROM MENU”
CAN CIRC 4 of CAN communication line.
× mode.
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 5
×
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 6
×
[OK/UNKWN]
CAN CIRC 7
×
[OK/UNKWN]
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
EC-308
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE
Monitored Item
ECM
Main
Monitored item [Unit] input Description Remarks
signals
signals
● Indicates the engine speed computed
ENG SPEED [rpm] × × from the signal of the crankshaft position
sensor (POS).
● The signal voltage of the mass air flow ● When engine is running specification
sensor specification is displayed. range is indicated.
● “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel
B/FUEL SCHDL injection pulse width programmed into ● When engine is running specification
×
[msec] ECM, prior to any learned on board cor- range is indicated.
rection.
● When engine is running specification EC
● The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feed- range is indicated.
A/F ALPHA-B1 [%] × back correction factor per cycle is indi-
cated. ● This data also includes the data for the
air-fuel ratio learning control.
NOTE:
● Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors
FUEL INJEC- trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
● Fuel injectors
TION ● Change the amount of fuel injec- CHECK ITEM.
tion using CONSULT-II. ● Heated oxygen sensor 1
● Engine: Return to the original

trouble condition
IGNITION TIM- If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Perform “Idle Air Volume Learn-
● Timing light: Set
ING CHECK ITEM. ing”.
● Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-II.
the engine. ● Harness and connectors
● A/C switch OFF ● Compression
POWER BAL- ● Shift lever: ● Fuel injectors
Engine runs rough or dies.
ANCE N (A/T models) ● Power transistor
Neutral (M/T models) ● Spark plugs
● Cut off each injector signal one at ● Ignition coils
a time using CONSULT-II.
● Ignition switch: ON ● Harness and connectors

COOLING FAN* ● Turn the cooling fan “ON” and Cooling fan moves and stops. ● Cooling fan relay
“OFF” with CONSULT-II. ● Cooling fan motor
● Engine: Return to the original ● Harness and connectors

ENG COOLANT trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see ● Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP ● Change the engine coolant tem- CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-II. ● Fuel injectors
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
FUEL PUMP Fuel pump relay makes the operat- ● Harness and connectors
RELAY ● Turn the fuel pump relay “ON” ing sound. ● Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-II
and listen to operating sound.
EC-309
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
● Engine: After warming up, run
engine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL ● Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to ● Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. ● Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-II.
● Engine: Return to the original
● Harness and connectors
V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
ANGLE CHECK ITEM. ● Intake valve timing control sole-
● Change intake valve timing using
noid valve
CONSULT-II.
*: Leaving cooling fan “OFF” with CONSULT-II while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.
REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)

Description
CONSULT-II has two kinds of triggers and they can be selected by touching “SETTING” in “DATA MONITOR”
mode.
1. “AUTO TRIG” (Automatic trigger):
● The malfunction will be identified on the CONSULT-II screen
in real time.
In other words, DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will be
displayed if the malfunction is detected by ECM.
At the moment a malfunction is detected by ECM, “MONI-
TOR” in “DATA MONITOR” screen is changed to “Recording
Data... xx%” as shown at right, and the data after the malfunc-
tion detection is recorded. Then when the percentage
reached 100%, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is displayed. If
“STOP” is touched on the screen during “Recording Data...
xx%”, “REAL-TIME DIAG” screen is also displayed.
SEF705Y
The recording time after the malfunction detection and the
recording speed can be changed by “TRIGGER POINT” and
“Recording Speed”. Refer to CONSULT-II OPERATION MAN-
UAL.
2. “MANU TRIG” (Manual trigger):
● DTC/1st trip DTC and malfunction item will not be displayed
automatically on CONSULT-II screen even though a malfunc-
tion is detected by ECM.
DATA MONITOR can be performed continuously even though
a malfunction is detected.
SEF707X
Operation
1. “AUTO TRIG”
● While trying to detect the DTC/1st trip DTC by performing the DTC Confirmation Procedure, be sure to
select to “DATA MONITOR (AUTO TRIG)” mode. You can confirm the malfunction at the moment it is
detected.
● While narrowing down the possible causes, CONSULT-II should be set in “DATA MONITOR (AUTO
TRIG)” mode, especially in case the incident is intermittent.
When you are inspecting the circuit by gently shaking (or twisting) the suspicious connectors, compo-
nents and harness in the DTC Confirmation Procedure, the moment a malfunction is found the DTC/1st
trip DTC will be displayed. (Refer to “Incident Simulation Tests” in “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT
DIAGNOSES FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, GI-21.)
2. “MANU TRIG”
● If the malfunction is displayed as soon as “DATA MONITOR” is selected, reset CONSULT-II to “MANU
TRIG”. By selecting “MANU TRIG” you can monitor and store the data. The data can be utilized for fur-
ther diagnosis, such as a comparison with the value for the normal operating condition.
EC-310
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
PBIB0197E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TGA
Remarks:
● Specification data are reference values.
● Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
i.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show the specification data in
spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIMING monitors the data calculated by the ECM
according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor and other ignition timing related sensors.
ENG SPEED
● Engine: After warming up Idle Approx. 0.8V

● No-load
● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
● No-load
A/F ALPHA-B1 ● Engine: After warming up 75% - 125%
rpm
HO2S1 (B1) ● Engine: After warming up 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
rpm
EC-311
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) ● Engine: After warming up Changes more than 5 times dur-
rpm
ing 10 seconds.
● Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-II value with the speedometer Almost the same speed as the
VEH SPEED SE
indication. speedometer indication.
BATTERY VOLT ● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14V
● Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V

ACCEL SEN1
(engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.0 - 4.8V

ACCEL SEN2*1 (engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.8V
Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36V
(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2*1 ● Shift lever:
D (A/T models) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
1st (M/T models)
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
Shift lever: P or N (A/T models)
ON
the engine
ON
OFF

HEATER FAN SW
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up M/T: 2±5° BTDC (QG13DE)

A/T: 6±5° BTDC (QG13DE)
● Shift lever:
M/T: 8°±5° BTDC
N (A/T models) Idle
IGN TIMING (QG16DE,QG18DE)
AT:10°±5°BTDC
● Air conditioner switch: OFF (QG16DE,QG18DE)
● No-load 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
EC-312
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
PURG VOL C/V Neutral (M/T models) 2,000 rpm 15 - 30%
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
INT/V TIM (B1) Neutral (M/T models) When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
Approx. 0° - 30°CA
quickly
● No-load
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2% EC
● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
INT/V SOL (B1) Neutral (M/T models) When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
Approx. 0% - 60%
quickly
● No-load
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
the engine ON
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF
THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON
OFF
(201°F) or less
● Engine: After warming up, idle Engine coolant temperature is
COOLING FAN the engine between 95°C (203°F) and 104°C LOW
● Air conditioner switch: OFF (219°F)
HIGH
(221°F) or more
● Engine speed: ON
HO2S1 HTR (B1) Below 3,600 rpm
● Engine speed:
OFF
Above 3,600 rpm
● Engine coolant temperature when engine started: More than 80° (176°F)
O2SEN HTR DTY Approx. 50%
● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
● Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) Approx. 0V
AC PRESS SEN ● Engine: Idle
1.0 - 4.0V
● Turn drive wheels and compare speedometer indication with the CON- Almost the same speed as the
VEH SPEED SE
SULT-II value. CONSULT-II value
The preset vehicle speed is dis-
SET VHCL SPD ● Engine: Running ASCD: Operating
played.
CRUISE switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW ● Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW ● Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
EC-313
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
ACCEL/RES switch: Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW ● Ignition switch: ON
ACCEL/RES switch: Released OFF
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON
SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON
SET/COAST switch: Released OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released ON
BRAKE SW1 ● Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW2 ● Ignition switch: ON
CRUISE switch is depressed at first
CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON ON → OFF
time → second time
● CRUISE switch: ON SET switch pressed ON
SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is between

40 km/h (25 MPH) and 130 km/h ASCD control is canceled OFF
(80 MPH)
CAN COMM OK
CAN CIRC 1 OK
CAN CIRC 2 OK or UNKWN
CAN CIRC 3 UNKWN
CAN CIRC 4 OK
CAN CIRC 5 UNKWN
CAN CIRC 6 UNKWN
CAN CIRC 7 UNKWN
*1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TGB
The following are the major sensor reference graphs in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1
Below is the data for “CLSD THL POS”, “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” when depressing the accelera-
tor pedal with the ignition switch “ON” and with selector lever in D position (A/T models) or with shift lever in
1st position (M/T models).
The signal of “ACCEL SEN 1” and “THRTL SEN 1” should rise gradually without any intermittent drop or rise
after “CLSD THL POS” is changed from ON to OFF.
PBIB0198E
ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S1 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1
Below is the data for “ENG SPEED”, “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “THRTL SEN 1”, “HO2S1 (B1)” and “INJ PULSE-B1”
when revving engine quickly up to 4,800 rpm under no load after warming up engine sufficiently.
Each value is for reference, the exact value may vary.
EC-314
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EC
PBIB0913E
EC-315
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE PFP:00031
Description EBS00TGC
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)”
mode of CONSULT-II during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “DATA MONI-
TOR (SPEC)” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the value in
“DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have one or
more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not light the
MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
● B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board cor-
rection)
● A/F ALPHA-B1 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
● MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Testing Condition EBS00TGD
● Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,017 miles)

● Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
● Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
● Transmission: Warmed-up*1
● Electrical load: Not applied*2
● Engine speed: Idle
*1: For A/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “FLUID
TEMP SE” (A/T fluid temperature sensor signal) indicates more than 60°C (140°F).
For M/T models, after the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle for 5 minutes.
*2: Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch, lighting switch are “OFF”. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
Inspection Procedure EBS00TGE
NOTE:
Perform “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-278, "Basic Inspection".
2. Confirm that the testing conditions indicated above are met.
3. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “MAS A/F SE-
B1” in “DATA MONITOR (SPEC)” mode with CONSULT-II.
4. Make sure that monitor items are within the SP value.
SEF601Z
EC-316
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TGF
EC
SEF613ZD
EC-317
SEF768Z
EC-318
EC
SEF615ZA
EC-319
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT PFP:00006
Description EBS00TGG
Intermittent incidents (I/I) may occur. In many cases, the malfunction resolves itself (the part or circuit function
returns to normal without intervention). It is important to realize that the symptoms described in the customer's
complaint often do not recur on (1st trip) DTC visits. Realize also that the most frequent cause of I/I occur-
rences is poor electrical connections. Because of this, the conditions under which the incident occurred may
not be clear. Therefore, circuit checks made as part of the standard diagnostic procedure may not indicate the
specific malfunctioning area.
Common I/I Report Situations
STEP in Work Flow Situation
II The CONSULT-II is used. The SELF-DIAG RESULTS screen shows time data other than 0 or [1t].
III The symptom described by the customer does not recur.
IV (1st trip) DTC does not appear during the DTC Confirmation Procedure.
VI The Diagnostic Procedure for PXXXX does not indicate the malfunctioning area.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TGH
1. INSPECTION START
Erase (1st trip) DTCs. Refer to EC-265, "HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMA-
TION".
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK GROUND TERMINALS

Check ground terminals for corroding or loose connection.
Refer to “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSES FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCEDENT”, GI-21, “Inci-
dent Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. SEARCH FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT

Perform “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSES FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”, GI-21, “Incident
Simulation Tests”.
OK or NG
EC-320
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM PFP:24110
Wiring Diagram EBS00TGI
EC
GEC466A
EC-321
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
1 B ECM ground Engine ground
● Idle speed
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
111 W/G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
tion switch OFF

116 B ● Idle speed
120 W (11 - 14V)
(Back-up) (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TGJ
1. INSPECTION START
Start engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 10.
No >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 109 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
MBIB0015E
EC-322
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuse
4. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. EC
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and engine ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
6. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

PBIB1699E
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminals 1 and 6 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
SEF420X
EC-323
● 10A fuse
● 15A fuse

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 111 and ECM relay terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
9. CHECK ECM RELAY

OK or NG
OK >> Go to EC-383, "DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL".
10. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY-III

1. Stop engine.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
MBIB0026E

Check the harness for open or short between ECM and harness connector F36.
EC-324
1. Stop engine and wait at least 10 seconds.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and then OFF.
Voltage: After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
voltage will exist for a 4 seconds, then drop
approximately 0V.
PBIB1630E EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
NG (Battery voltage does not exist.)>>GO TO 13.
NG (Battery voltage exists for more than a few seconds.)>>GO TO 15.

PBIB1699E
2. Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 3 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.
SEF860T

● Harness for open or short between ECM relay and F36
EC-325
15. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 119, 120 and ECM relay terminal 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 16.
16. CHECK ECM RELAY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 17.
17. CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 1, 115, 116 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 18.

Check the following
● Harness for open or short between ECM and engine ground

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TGK
ECM RELAY
2. Check continuity between relay terminals 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
Yes
OFF No
PBIB0077E
EC-326
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE PFP:23710
Description EBS00TGL
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TGM
The MIL will not light up for this diagnosis.

Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
U1000
EC
● ECM cannot communicate to other control
1000 units. ● Harness or connectors
CAN communication
(CAN communication line is open or
U1001 line ● ECM cannot communicate for more than the shorted.)
1001 specified time.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TGN

3. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-329, "Diagnostic Procedure".
EC-327
Wiring Diagram EBS00TGO
GEC399A
EC-328
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TGP
1. INSPECTION START
2. Select “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Print out the CONSULT-II screen.
A/T models
EC
PBIB1057E
M/T models
MBIB0009E
>> Go to “CAN COMMUNICATION”, EL-304.
EC-329
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR PFP:22680
Component Description EBS00TGQ
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It mea-
sures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire intake
flow. It consists of a hot film that is supplied with electric current from
the ECM. The temperature of the hot film is controlled by the ECM a
certain amount. The heat generated by the hot film is reduced as the
intake air flows around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the ECM must supply more electric current to maintain
the temperature of the hot film as air flow increases. The ECM
detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIB1604E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TGR

● Engine: After warming up Idle Approx. 0.8V

● No-load
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TGS
These self-diagnoses have the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
● Harness or connectors
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0102 low input is sent to ECM when engine is running. ● Intake air leaks
P0103 Mass air flow sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0103 high input is sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the malfunction is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TGT
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
With CONSULT-II
EC-330
3. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
2. Tarn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
EC
With CONSULT-II
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
If DTC is not detected, go to next step.
EC-331
Wiring Diagram EBS00TGU
GEC467A
EC-332
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition Approximately 0.8V
● Idle speed
50 Y Mass air flow sensor
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
(Mass air flow sensor)
● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TGV
1. INSPECTION START
Which malfunction (P0102 or P0103) is duplicated?
P0102 or P0103
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
2. CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM

Check the following for connection.
● Air duct
● Vacuum hoses
● Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Reconnect the parts.

>> GO TO 4.
PBIB1700E
EC-333
4. CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect MAF sensor harness connector.
PBIB1701E
3. Check voltage between MAF sensor terminals 2 and ground

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB1168E

● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
● Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM relay
6. CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 67.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between MAF sensor terminal 4 and ECM terminal 50.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
EC-334
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TGW
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR EC

1. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.
3. Check voltage between ECM terminal 50 (Mass air flow sensor
signal) and ground.
Condition Voltage V
Ignition switch “ON” (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating
Approx. 0.8
temperature.)
2,500 rpm (Engine is warmed-up to normal
1.5 - 2.1
operating temperature.)
Idle to about 4,000 rpm* Approx. 0.8 to Approx. 4.0
MBIB0017E
*: Check for liner voltage rise in response to engine being increased to about
4,000 rpm.
4. If the voltage is out of specification, proceed the following.
a. Turn ignition switch OFF.
b. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.
c. Perform steps 2 and 3 again.
5. If NG, remove mass air flow sensor from air duct. Check hot film for damage or dust.
6. If NG, clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
EC-335
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description EBS00TGY
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
−10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 72
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground. SEF012P
CAUTION:
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TGZ
DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
P0117 Engine coolant temperature An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0117 sensor circuit low input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0118 Engine coolant temperature An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
0118 sensor circuit high input sent to ECM.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
When the DTC is detected, the ECM enters fail-safe mode and the MIL lights up.
Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the time after turning ignition switch ON
or START.
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-II display)
Engine coolant temper- Just as ignition switch is turned ON or Start 40°C (104°F)
ature sensor circuit More than approx. 4 minutes after ignition ON or
80°C (176°F)
Start
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling fan operates
while engine is running.
EC-336
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TH0
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
4. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-339, "Diagnostic Proce-
dure".
EC
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-337
Wiring Diagram EBS00TH1
GEC403A
EC-338
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TH2
1. CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness
connector.
PBIB1702E EC
4. Check voltage between ECT sensor terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0080E
2. CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between ECT sensor terminal 2 and ECM terminal 73.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-339
Component Inspection EBS00TH3

1. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals 1 and 2 as shown in the figure.
PBIB0081E
<Reference data>
Engine coolant
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal
72 (Engine coolant temperature sensor) and ground.
2. If NG, replace engine coolant temperature sensor. SEF012P
Removal and Installation EBS00TH4

EC-340
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description EBS00TH5
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are
a kind of potentiometers which transform the throttle valve position
into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In addi-
tion, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the
throttle valve and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the
throttle valve opening angle properly in response to driving condi-
PBIB0145E
tion.
EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TH6

(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1
THRTL SEN2* ● Shift lever:
1st (M/T models)
*: Throttle position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TH7

P0122 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 2 ● Harness or connectors
0122 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0123 Throttle position sensor 2 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 2 ● Electric throttle control actuator
0123 circuit high input is sent to ECM.
(TP sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in order for the idle position to be within +10
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
So, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TH8
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
EC-341
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
4. If DTC is detected, go to EC-346, "Component Inspection".
EC-342
Wiring Diagram EBS00TH9
EC
GEC404A
EC-343
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
power supply
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is D (A/T models) More than 0.36V
● Shift lever position is 1st (M/T models)
● Engine stopped
● Shift lever position is D (A/T models) Less than 4.75V
[Engine is running]
ground
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
● Engine stopped
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00THA

>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1700E
EC-344
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.
PBIB1705E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 66 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-345
6. REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace the electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00THB

1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
4. Set selector lever to D position (A/T models) or 1st position (M/T models).
5. Check voltage between ECM terminals 49 (TP sensor 1 signal),
68 (TP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the following
conditions.
Terminal Accelerator pedal Voltage
49 Fully released More than 0.36V

(Throttle position sensor 1) Fully depressed Less than 4.75V
68 Fully released Less than 4.75V

(Throttle position sensor 2) Fully depressed More than 0.36V
6. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to the next MBIB0022E
step.
Remove and Installation EBS00THC
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR

EC-346
DTC P0132 HO2S1
DTC P0132 HO2S1 PFP:22690
Component Description EBS00THD
The heated oxygen sensor 1 is placed into the exhaust manifold. It

detects the amount of oxygen in the exhaust gas compared to the
outside air. The heated oxygen sensor 1 has a closed-end tube
made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from
approximately 1V in richer conditions to 0V in leaner conditions. The
heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is sent to the ECM. The ECM adjusts
the injection pulse duration to achieve the ideal air-fuel ratio. The
ideal air-fuel ratio occurs near the radical change from 1V to 0V.
SEF463R
EC
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00THE

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Changes more than 5 times during
10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00THF
To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the heated oxy-
gen sensor 1 output is not inordinately high.
SEF301U
P0132 Heated oxygen sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the sensor (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0132 circuit high voltage is sent to ECM.
EC-347
DTC P0132 HO2S1
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00THG
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
5. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
dure".
SEF174Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
3. Restart engine and let it idle for 2 minutes.
EC-348
DTC P0132 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram EBS00THH
EC
GEC407A
EC-349
DTC P0132 HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor [Engine is running]

ground ● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00THI
1. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

2. Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.
Tightening 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-lb)
torque:
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1703E
2. CHECK HO2S1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 74 and HO2S1
terminal 4.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3. PBIB1704E
EC-350
DTC P0132 HO2S1
3. CHECK HO2S1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 and HO2S1 terminal 1.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 35 or HO2S1 terminal 1 and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC
4. CHECK HO2S1 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
Check heated oxygen sensor 1 connectors for water.
Water should not exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00THJ
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MANU TRIG” and adjust “TRIGGER POINT” to 100% in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-
II.
3. Select “HO2S1 (B1)” and “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)”.
4. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load during the follow-
ing steps.
5. Touch “RECORD” on CONSULT-II screen.
SEF646Y
EC-351
DTC P0132 HO2S1
6. Check the following.
● “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode changes
from “RICH” to “LEAN” to “RICH” more than 5 times in 10 sec-
onds.
5 times (cycles) are counted as shown at right.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes above 0.6V at least once.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage goes below 0.3V at least once.
● “HO2S1 (B1)” voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
2. Set voltmeter probes between ECM terminal 35 (HO2S1 signal) and engine ground.
3. Check the following with engine speed held at 2,000 rpm con-
stant under no load.
● The voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to 1.0V
more than 5 times within 10 seconds.
● The maximum voltage is over 0.6V at least one time.
● The minimum voltage is below 0.3V at least one time.
● The voltage never exceeds 1.0V.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: MBIB0018E
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped

from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
Removal and Installation EBS00THK

EC-352
DTC P0134 HO2S1
DTC P0134 HO2S1 PFP:22690
Component Description EBS00THL

SEF463R
EC
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00THM

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) rpm Changes more than 5 times dur-
ing 10 seconds.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00THN
Under the condition in which the heated oxygen sensor 1 signal is

not input, the ECM circuits will read a continuous approximately
0.3V. Therefore, for this diagnosis, the time that output voltage is
within 200 to 400 mV range is monitored, and the diagnosis checks
that this time is not inordinately long.
SEF237U
P0134 Heated oxygen sensor 1 The voltage from the sensor is constantly (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0134 circuit no activity detected approx. 0.3V.
EC-353
DTC P0134 HO2S1
Overall Function Check EBS00THO
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Select “MANU TRIG” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II, and select “HO2S1 (B1)”.
3. Hold engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load.
4. Make sure that the indications do not remain in the range
between 0.2 to 0.4V.
SEF646Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
– The voltage does not remain in the range of 0.2 to 0.4V.
MBIB0018E
EC-354
DTC P0134 HO2S1
Wiring Diagram EBS00THP
EC
GEC407A
EC-355
DTC P0134 HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
Heated oxygen sensor [Engine is running]

Diagnostic Procedure EBS00THQ
1. INSPECTION START
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1700E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power PBIB1704E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-356
DTC P0134 HO2S1
Refer to EC-356, "Diagnostic Procedure".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00THR
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 EC

With CONSULT-II
II.
ing steps.
SEF646Y

onds.
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
EC-357
DTC P0134 HO2S1
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Without CONSULT-II
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: MBIB0018E
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been

dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor;
use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
Removal and Installation EBS00THS

EC-358
DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description EBS00THT

PBIB0145E
tion.
EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00THU

(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1
1st (M/T models)
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00THV

P0222 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor 1 ● Harness or connectors
0222 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The TP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P0223 Throttle position sensor 1 An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor 1 ● Electric throttle control actuator
0223 circuit high input is sent to ECM.
(TP sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00THW
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
EC-359
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-360
Wiring Diagram EBS00THX
EC
GEC405A
EC-361
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
power supply
● Engine stopped
● Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
ground
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
● Engine stopped
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00THY

>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1700E
EC-362
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PBIB1705E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-363
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00THZ

conditions.


step.
Remove and Installation EBS00TI0

EC-364
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
DTC P0327, P0328 KS PFP:22060
Component Description EBS00TI1
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine

knocking using a piezoelectric element. A knocking vibration from
the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is
converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
PBIB1708E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TI2

EC

DTC No. Trouble Diagnosis Name DTC Detected Condition Possible Cause
P0327 Knock sensor circuit low An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
0327 input sent to ECM.
P0328 Knock sensor circuit high An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
● Knock sensor
0328 input sent to ECM.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TI3
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
dure".
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-365
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Wiring Diagram EBS00TI4
GEC408A
EC-366
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
15 W Knock sensor Approximately 2.5V
● Idle speed
Knock sensor shield circuit [Engine is running]

54 — Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TI5
1. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I EC

3. Check resistance between ECM terminal 15 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II

2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 15 and knock
sensor terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1708E
3. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace knock sensor.
EC-367
DTC P0327, P0328 KS
Loosen and retighten engine ground screws.
>> GO TO 5.
MBIB0095E
5. CHECK KNOCK SENSOR SHIELD CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Reconnect knock sensor harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 54 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TI6
KNOCK SENSOR
Check resistance between knock sensor terminal 1 and ground.
NOTE:
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more
than 10 MΩ.
Resistance: Approximately 530 - 590kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Do not use any knock sensors that have been dropped or phys-
ically damaged. Use only new ones.
SEF227W
Removal and Installation EBS00TI7
KNOCK SENSOR
EC-368
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) PFP:23731
Component Description EBS00TI8
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the cylinder

block rear housing facing the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate at
the end of the crankshaft. It detects the fluctuation of the engine rev-
olution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
change.
changes.
PBIB0562E
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution. EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TI9

ENG SPEED
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TIA
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not
detected by the ECM during the first few seconds of
engine cranking.
(The sensor circuit is open or
P0335 Crankshaft position ● The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft position shorted.)
0335 sensor (POS) circuit sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM while the engine is
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
running.
● Signal plate
● The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal is not in
the normal pattern during engine running.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TIB
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
2. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
dure".
SEF058Y
EC-369
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
EC-370
Wiring Diagram EBS00TIC
EC
GEC468A
EC-371
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 3V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
13*1 Crankshaft position PBIB0527E

R
(14) *2 sensor (POS)
Approximately 3V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0528E
Crankshaft position [Engine is running]

sensor (POS) ground ● Idle speed
*1: Without NATS.
*2: With NATS.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TID

>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1700E
EC-372
2. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness
connector.
PBIB1709E
3. Check voltage between CKP sensor (POS) terminal 3 and EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SEF509Y

● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between crankshaft position sensor (POS) and ECM relay
4. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 30 and CKP sensor (POS) terminal 1
4. Also check harness for and short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
EC-373
5. CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 (Without NATS) or 14 (With NATS) and CKP sensor
(POS) terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
7. CHECK GEAR TOOTH

Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace the signal plate.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TIE

2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
PBIB0563E
EC-374
3 (+) - 1 (-)
3 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 1 (-)
6. If NG, replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
MBIB0024E
Removal and Installation EBS00TIF

EC
EC-375
DTC P0340 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) PFP:23731
Component Description EBS00TIG
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of

intake valve camshaft to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft
position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
PBIB0562E
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TIH
● The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM ● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
for the first few seconds during engine
● Camshaft sprocket (Exhaust)
cranking.
P0340 Camshaft position sensor (QG13DE engine models)
● The cylinder No. signal is not set to ECM
0340 (PHASE) circuit ● Camshaft (Intake)
during engine running.
(QG16DE and QG18DE engine models)
● The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
● Starter motor (Refer to SC-13.)
pattern during engine running.
● Starting system circuit (Refer to SC-13.)
● Dead (Weak) battery
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TII
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5V with igni-
tion switch ON.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 sec-
onds at idle speed.
dure".
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
5. Maintain engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 sec-
onds.
dure". SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Crank engine for at least 2 seconds and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.
If 1st trip DTC is not detected, go to next step.
EC-376
6. Start engine and maintain engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
EC
EC-377
Wiring Diagram EBS00TIJ
GEC469A
EC-378
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EC
14*1 Camshaft position PBIB0525E
R
(13)*2 sensor (PHASE)
1.0 - 4.0V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0526E
Camshaft position [Engine is running]

29 B sensor (PHASE) Approximately 0V
*1: Without NATS.
*2: With NATS.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TIK
1. CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over?
Does the starter motor operate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Check starting system. (Refer to “STARTING SYSTEM”, SC-13.)

>> GO TO 3.
PBIB1700E
EC-379
3. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness
connector.
PBIB1732E
PBIB1710E
3. Check voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 3 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF509Y

● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM
● Harness for open or short between camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and ECM relay
EC-380
5. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 29 and CMP sensor (PHASE) terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 (Without NATS) or 13 (With NATS) and CMP sensor EC
(PHASE) terminal 2.
2. Also check harness for short to ground or short to power.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)

OK or NG
OK (QG13DE engine models)>>GO TO 8.
OK (QG16DE and QG18DE engine models)>>GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
8. CHECK CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (EXHAUST)

● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft sprocket
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft sprocket
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
sprocket.
PBIB1780E
EC-381
9. CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
● Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
● Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
PBIB0565E

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TIL

2. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
PBIB0563E

3 (+) - 1 (-)
3 (+) - 2 (-) Except 0 or ∞
2 (+) - 1 (-)
MBIB0024E
Removal and Installation EBS00TIM

Refer to “TIMING CHAIN”, EM-23 (QG13DE engine models) or “CYLINDER HEAD”, EM-42 (QG16DE and
QG18DE engine models).
EC-382
DTC P0350 IGNITION SIGNAL PFP:22448
Component Description EBS00TIN
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR

The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the
power transistor. The power transistor turns on and off the ignition
coil primary circuit. This on-off operation induces the proper high
voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
PBIB1711E
EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TU4
(The ignition primary circuit is open or
shorted.)
● Power transistor unit built into ignition coil
The ignition signal in the primary circuit is
P0350 Ignition coil primary/ ● Condenser
not sent to ECM during engine cranking
0350 secondary circuit
or running. ● Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
● Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
● Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TU5
NOTE:
● If DTC P0350 is displayed with DTC P0335 or P0340, perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0335 or
P0340 first. Refer to EC-369 or EC-376.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to
START for at least 5 seconds.)
dure".
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine. (If engine does not run, turn ignition switch to START for at least 5 seconds.)
EC-383
Wiring Diagram EBS00TIO
GEC478A
EC-384
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0V
● For a 4 seconds after turning ignition switch
ECM relay OFF
111 W/G
(Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than a 4 seconds passed after turning (11 - 14V)
ignition switch OFF
EC
120 W (11 - 14V)
EC-385
GEC429A
EC-386
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EC
PBIB0521E
61 BR Ignition signal No. 1
80 PU Ignition signal No. 2
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0522E
EC-387
GEC430A
EC-388
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 0.1V
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EC
PBIB0521E
60 L/R Ignition signal No. 3
79 GY/R Ignition signal No. 4
0 - 0.2V
[Engine is running]
PBIB0522E
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TIP
1. CHECK ENGINE START

Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine.
Is engine running?
Yes or No
Yes (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 12.
No >> GO TO 4.
2. SEARCH FOR MALFUNCTIONING CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
CONSULT-II.
2. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
NG >> GO TO 12.
PBIB0133E
EC-389
3. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Go to EC-321, "POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR ECM".
MBIB0034E
4. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

4. Check voltage between condenser terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0624E
5. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III

3. Check harness continuity between ECM relay terminal 7 and
condenser terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
PBIB1699E
EC-390
6. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
Check voltage between ECM relay terminal 6 and ground with CON-
SULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
PBIB0625E
7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART EC

● Fusible link and fuse box connector E70
● 15A fuse
8. CHECK ECM RELAY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
9. CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between condenser terminal 2 and ground.
Refer to Wiring diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connector.
10. CHECK CONDENSER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
EC-391
11. CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
PBIB1711E
5. Check voltage between ignition coil terminal 3 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
PBIB0138E
12. CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ignition coil terminal 2 and engine ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
13. CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminals 60, 61, 79, 80 and ignition coil terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
EC-392
14. CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> Replace ignition coil with power transistor.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TIQ
ECM RELAY EC
Yes
OFF No
PBIB0077E
CONDENSER
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
MBIB0031E

3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 and 1 Except 0 or ∞
3 and 2
Except 0
1 and 2
PBIB0847E
EC-393
Removal and Installation EBS00TIR

EC-394
DTC P0500 VSS
DTC P0500 VSS PFP:32702
Description EBS00TIS
NOTE:
If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
The vehicle speed sensor is installed in the transaxle. It contains a pulse generator which provides a vehicle
speed signal to the combination meter. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM through CAN
communication line.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TIT
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.) EC
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from ● Harness or connectors
P0500
Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed sensor is sent to ECM (The vehicle speed sensor circuit is open or
0500
even when vehicle is being driven. shorted.)
● Combination meter
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TIU
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Steps 1 and 2 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II. The vehicle speed on CONSULT-
II should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
4. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
5. Maintain the following conditions for at least 60 consecutive sec-
onds.
ENG SPEED A/T More than 2,000 rpm
QG13DE
M/T More then 2,300 rpm
A/T More then 1,800 rpm
QG16DE
A/T More then 1,900 rpm SEF196Y
QG18DE
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 70°C (158°F)
EC-395
DTC P0500 VSS
B/FUEL SCHDL A/T 4.1 - 8.2 msec
QG13DE
M/T 3.6 - 5.3 msec
A/T 4.3 - 8.7 msec
QG16DE
M/T 3.7 - 7.1 msec
A/T 4.6 - 31.8 msec
QG18DE
M/T 4.1 - 31.8 msec
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
Overall Function Check EBS00TIV
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this check, a 1st trip
DTC might not be confirmed.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed with combination meter.
The vehicle speed indication should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suit-
able gear position.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TIW
1. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

Refer to “METERS AND GAUGES”, EL-86.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER

Check combination meter function.
>> INSPECTION END
EC-396
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR
DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR PFP:49763
Component Description EBS00TIX
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power

steering high-pressure tube and detects a power steering load. This
sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load
into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the
throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed and
adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
PBIB1712E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TIY

EC

the engine
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TIZ

P0550 Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from the (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
0550 sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM.
● Power steering pressure sensor
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TJ0
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-397
Wiring Diagram EBS00TJ1
GEC412A
EC-398
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.0V
● Steering wheel is being turned.
12 W Power steering pressure sensor
[Engine is running]
0.4 - 0.8V
● Steering wheel is not being turned.
Sensors' ground [Engine is running]
57 B (Power steering pressure sensor/ Approximately 0V
Refrigerant pressure sensor) ● Idle speed
EC
Sensor power supply (Power
steering pressure sensor)
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TJ2

>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1700E
2. CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect PSP sensor harness connector.
PBIB1712E
3. Check voltage between PSP sensor terminal 1 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0188E
EC-399
3. CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 57 and PSP sensor terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 12 and PSP sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK PSP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PSP sensor.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TJ3
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR

Condition Voltage
Steering wheel is being turned fully. 0.5 - 4.0V
Steering wheel is not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8V
MBIB0025E
EC-400
DTC P0605 ECM
DTC P0605 ECM PFP:23710
Component Description EBS00TJ4
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
PBIB1164E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TJ5

EC
This self-diagnosis has one or tow trip detection logic.

A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605
Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. ● ECM
0605
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
ECM enters fail-safe mode when malfunction A is detected.
Detected items Engine operation condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5
Malfunction A
degrees) by the return spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TJ6
Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A first. If the DTC cannot be confirmed, perform PROCE-
DURE FOR MALFUNCTION B. If there is no problem on PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B, perform
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
NOTE:
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
EC-401
DTC P0605 ECM
Without CONSULT-II
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
With CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn
ON.
dure".
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
ON.
4. Repeat step 3 for 32 times.
dure".
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
2. Turn ignition switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds and then turn ON.
EC-402
DTC P0605 ECM
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TJ7
1. INSPECTION START
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
4. Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See EC-401.
5. Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again?
Without CONSULT-II
2. Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory. Refer to EC-265, "HOW TO ERASE EC
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION".
See EC-401.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END
2. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-266,
"NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System)".
>> INSPECTION END
EC-403
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY
DTC P1065 ECM POWER SUPPLY PFP:23710
Component Description EBS00TJ8
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
PBIB1164E
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TJ9
P1065 ECM back up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back-up) circuit is
ECM power supply circuit open or shorted.]
1065 properly.
● ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TJA
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
ON.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for 4 times.
dure".
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-404
Wiring Diagram EBS00TJB
EC
GEC471A
EC-405
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
(Buck-up) (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TJC
1. CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0026E

● Fusible link and fuse box connector E67, E68
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ECM and battery

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-406
4. PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
2. Select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch “ERASE”.
See EC-404.
Without CONSULT-II
2. Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory. Refer to EC-265, "HOW TO ERASE
EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION". EC
See EC-404.
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 5.
No >> INSPECTION END
5. REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition key IDs. Refer to EC-266,
"NATS (Nissan Anti-theft System)".
>> INSPECTION END
EC-407
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
DTC P1111 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:23796
Description EBS00TJD
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Engine speed
Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature timing control solenoid valve
Vehicle speed signal* Vehicle speed
*: This input signal is sent to the ECM through CAN communication line.
MBIB0121E
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve.
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing control solenoid
valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake valve to
increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF
pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB0195E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TJE
EC-408
● Engine: After warming up Idle 0% - 2%
● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
INT/V SOL (B1) Neutral (M/T models) When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm
Approx. 0% - 60%
quickly
● No-load
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TJF
An improper voltage is sent to the ECM ● Harness or connectors

P1111 Intake valve timing control (Solenoid valve circuit is open or shorted.)
through intake valve timing control solenoid
1111 solenoid valve circuit
valve. ● Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
EC
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TJG
NOTE:
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
dure".
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-409
Wiring Diagram EBS00TJH
GEC472A
EC-410
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Idle speed
Approximately 7 - 10V
Intake valve timing
62 Y/R
control solenoid valve [Engine is running] EC
● When revving engine up to 2,000 rpm quickly
PBIB1790E
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TJI
1. CHECK IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness
connector.
PBIB1713E
4. Check voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid

valve terminal 2 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0192E
EC-411
2. CHECK IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 62 and intake valve timing control solenoid valve termi-
nal 1. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Replace intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TJJ
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 Approximately 8Ω at 20°C (68°F)
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)
PBIB0193E
Removal and Installation EBS00TJK
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD”, EM-42.
EC-412
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR PFP:16119
Component Description EBS00TJL
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TJM

Electric throttle control actuator does not function
A)
properly due to the return spring malfunction.
EC
P1121 Electric throttle control
Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is ● Electric throttle control actuator
1121 actuator B)
not in specified range.
C) ECM detect the throttle valve is stuck open.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
The ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the idle position.
Malfunction A
The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
Malfunction B ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20 degrees or less.
While the vehicle is driving, it slows down gradually by fuel cut. After the vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
Malfunction C
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or more.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TJN
NOTE:
● Perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B first. If the 1st trip DTC cannot be confirmed,
perform PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition witch ON and wait at least 1 second.
3. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T models), 1st position (M/T
models) and wait at least 2 seconds.
ON.
8. If 1st trip DTC is detected, go to EC-414, "Diagnostic Proce- SEF058Y
dure".
Without CONSULT-II
2. Shift selector lever to D position (A/T models), 1st position (M/T models) and wait at least 2 seconds.
EC-413
DTC P1121 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
5. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
With CONSULT-II
4. Shift selector lever to N or P position.
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
3. Shift selector lever to N or P position.
4. Start engine and let it idle for the 3 seconds.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TJO
1. CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

1. Remove the intake air duct.
2. Check if a foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve
and the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside.
PBIB1706E

>> INSPECTION END

Remove and Installation EBS00TJP

EC-414
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
DTC P1122 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION PFP:16119
Description EBS00TJQ
NOTE:
If DTC P1122 is displayed with DTC P1121 or 1126, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P1121 or
P1126. Refer to EC-413 or EC-422.
Electric Throttle Control Actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TJR
This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic.

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause EC
(Throttle control motor circuit is open or shorted.)
P1122 Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open or
1122 performance problem not operate properly. shorted.)
● Electric throttle control actuator
● Throttle control motor relay
FAIL-SAFE MODE
Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TJS
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-415
Wiring Diagram EBS00TJT
GEC473A
EC-416
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Throttle control motor BATTERY VOLTAGE
power supply (11 - 14V)
0 - 14V
● Engine stopped
4 BR ● Shift lever position is D (A/T models)
(Close) EC
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V
● Engine stopped
5 Y ● Shift lever position is D (A/T models)
(Open)
PBIB1105E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TJU

>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1700E
EC-417
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check voltage between ECM terminal 3 and ground under the fol-
lowing conditions with CONSULT-II or tester.
Ignition switch Voltage
OFF Approximately 0V
Battery voltage
ON
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 3. MBIB0028E
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect throttle control motor relay.
PBIB1714E
3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminals 2, 5

and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0575E

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between throttle control motor relay and fuse
EC-418
5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and throttle control motor relay terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and throttle control motor relay
7. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and throttle control motor relay terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.

9. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace throttle control motor relay.
EC-419
10. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
4 Should exist
3
5 Should not exist
4 Should not exist PBIB1705E
6
5 Should exist
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.

2. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve and
the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
PBIB1706E
12. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 14.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-420
Component Inspection EBS00TJV
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

1. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between throttle control motor relay terminals 3
and 5.
12V direct current supply between terminals
Yes
1 and 2
3. If NG, replace throttle control motor relay.
PBIB0098E
EC
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
2. Check resistance between throttle control motor terminals 3 and
6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
PBIB0095E
Remove and Installation EBS00TJW

Refer to “OUTOR COMPONENT PARTS”, EM-10.
EC-421
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
DTC P1124, P1126 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY PFP:16119
Component Description EBS00TJX
Power supply for the Throttle Control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TJY

THRTL RELAY ● Ignition switch: ON ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TJZ

P1124 Throttle control motor ECM detect the throttle control motor relay (Throttle control motor relay circuit is shorted.)
1124 relay circuit short is stuck ON.
P1126 Throttle control motor ECM detects a voltage of power source for (Throttle control motor relay circuit is open.)
1126 relay circuit open throttle control motor is excessively low.
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TK0
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
With CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
EC-422
Without CONSULT-II
With CONSULT-II
EC
SEF058Y
Without CONSULT-II
EC-423
Wiring Diagram EBS00TK1
GEC474A
EC-424
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Throttle control motor BATTERY VOLTAGE
power supply (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TK2
1. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT EC

2. Disconnect throttle control motor relay.
PBIB1714E
3. Check voltage between throttle control motor relay terminals 2, 5

and ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0575E

● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between throttle control motor relay and fuse
EC-425
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 3 and throttle control motor relay terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.

5. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Check continuity between ECM terminal 104 and throttle control motor relay terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

>> Repair open circuit or short to ground short to power in harness or connectors.
7. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> Replace throttle control motor relay.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-426
Component Inspection EBS00TK3
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY

1. Apply 12V direct current between relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between throttle control motor relay terminals 3
and 5.
Yes
3. If NG, replace throttle control motor relay.
PBIB0098E
EC
EC-427
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
DTC P1128 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR PFP:16119
Component Description EBS00TK4
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides feed-
back to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle properly in
response to driving condition.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TK5

P1128 Throttle control motor ECM detects short both circuits between ECM (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
1128 circuit short and throttle control motor. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TK6
NOTE:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-428
Wiring Diagram EBS00TK7
EC
GEC475A
EC-429
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
0 - 14V
● Engine stopped
4 BR ● Shift lever position is D (A/T models)
(Close)
PBIB1104E
0 - 14V
● Engine stopped
5 Y ● Shift lever position is D (A/T models)
(Open)
PBIB1105E
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TK8

>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1700E
EC-430
2. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
ECM terminal Continuity
actuator terminal
4 Should exist
3
5 Should not exist
4 Should not exist PBIB1705E
6
5 Should exist
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
3. CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TK9
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR

2. Check resistance between throttle control motor terminals 3 and
6.
Resistance: Approximately 1 - 15 Ω [at 25 °C (77°F)]
3. If NG, replace electric throttle control actuator and go to next
step.
PBIB0095E
EC-431
Remove and Installation EBS00TKA

EC-432
DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE PFP:00000
System Description EBS00TKB
COOLING FAN CONTROL

Engine speed*1
Cooling fan
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle speed*2 Cooling fan relay
control
Air conditioner switch Air conditioner “ON” signal
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. EC
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 3 step control [HIGH/LOW/OFF].
OPERATION
PBIB0576E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TKC

MONITOR
ITEM
AIR COND
● Engine: After warming up, idle the engine Air conditioner switch: ON
SIG ON
EC-433
MONITOR
ITEM
OFF
ture is 94°C (201°F) or less
COOLING ● After warming up engine, idle the engine. ture is between 95°C LOW
FAN ● Air conditioner switch: OFF (203°F) and 104°C (219°F)
ture is 105°C (221°F) or HIGH
more
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TKD
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise. When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction
is indicated.
(The cooling fan circuit is open or
shorted)
● Cooling fan
● Thermostat
● Improper ignition timing
● Cooling fan does not operate properly ● Engine coolant temperature sensor
(Overheat). ● Blocked radiator
● Cooling fan system does not operate properly ● Blocked front end (Improper fitting of
P1217 Engine over temperature (Overheat).
1217 (Overheat) nose mask)
● Engine coolant was not added to the system ● Crushed vehicle frontal area (Vehicle
using the proper filling method. frontal is collided but not repaired)
● Engine coolant is not within the specified range. ● Blocked air passage by improper
installation of front fog lamp or fog
lamps.
● Improper mixture ratio of coolant
● Damaged bumper
For more information, refer to EC-445,
"Main 12 Causes of Overheating".
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, be sure to replace the coolant. Refer to “Changing Engine Coolant”,
LC-18. Also, replace the engine oil. Refer to “Changing Engine Oil”, LC-7.
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Be sure to
use coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to “Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio”, MA-9.
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
Overall Function Check EBS00TKE
Use this procedure to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might not be con-
firmed.
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.
EC-434
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF621W

SULT-II. EC
5. If the results are NG, go to EC-438, "Diagnostic Procedure".
SEF646X
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
3. Start engine.
4. Set temperature control lever to full cold position. SEF621W

7. Run engine at idle for a few minutes with air conditioner operating.
8. Make sure that cooling fan operates at low speed.
If OK, go to the following step.
11. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connec-
tor.
12. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor
harness connector.
SEC163BA
EC-435
13. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fan operates at
higher speed than low speed.
MEC475B
EC-436
Wiring Diagram EBS00TKF
EC
GEC476A
EC-437
CAUTION:
TER- WIRE
NO. R
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Cooling fan is operating at high speed
[Engine is running]
Approximately 0V
● Cooling fan is operating at low or high speed
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TKG
1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 4.

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II and touch “LOW” on the CONSULT-II screen.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-
442, "PROCEDURE A".)
SEF784Z

With CONSULT-II
1. Select “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CON-
SULT-II and touch “HIGH” on the CONSULT-II screen.
2. Make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at higher speed
than row speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
SEF785Z
EC-438
Without CONSULT-II
3. Set temperature lever at full cold position.
PBIB1714E
EC
SEC163BA
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Check cooling fan low speed control circuit. (Go to EC-442, "PROCEDURE A".)

Without CONSULT-II
2. Reconnect cooling fan relays-2 and -3.
4. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
5. Connect 150Ω resistor to engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
6. Restart engine and make sure that cooling fans-1 and -2 oper-
ate at higher speed than low speed.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
MEF613EA
EC-439
6. CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAK
Apply pressure to the cooling system with a tester, and check if the
pressure drops.
Testing pressure: 157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
CAUTION:
Higher than the specified pressure may cause radiator damage.
Pressure should not drop.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.
SLC754A

Check the following for leak.
● Hose
● Radiator
● Water pump (Refer to “Water pump”, LC-13.)
>> Repair or replace.
8. CHECK RADIATOR CAP

Apply pressure to cap with a tester and check radiator cap relief
pressure.
Radiator cap 59 - 98 kPa (0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0
relief pressure: kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi)
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace radiator cap.
SLC755A
9. CHECK THERMOSTAT
1. Remove thermostat.
2. Check valve seating condition at normal room temperatures.
It should seat tightly.
3. Check valve opening temperature and valve lift.
Valve opening temperature: 82°C (180°F) [standard]
Valve lift: More than 8 mm/95°C
(0.31 in/203°F)
4. Check if valve is closed at 5°C (9°F) below valve opening tem-
perature. For details, refer to “Thermostat”, LC-15.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> Replace thermostat. SLC343
EC-440
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
11. CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES

● If the cause cannot be isolated, go to EC-445, "Main 12 Causes of Overheating".
>> INSPECTION END
EC
EC-441
PROCEDURE A
2. Disconnect cooling fan relay-1.
4. Check voltage between cooling fan relay-1 terminals 1, 3, 6 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0951E

● 10A fuse
● 40A fusible links
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and fuse
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and battery

2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling
fan motor-2 harness connector.
4 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
4 and engine ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram. PBIB1715E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-442
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 14 and cooling fan relay-1 terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-1 and ECM
6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY-1

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace cooling fan relay.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-443
PROCEDURE B

4. Check voltage between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 terminals 1,
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB0424E

● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fuse
● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and fusible link

2. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and cooling fan motor-2 harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-444
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 13 and cooling fan relay-2 terminal 2, cooling fan relay-3
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Harness for open or short between cooling fan relays-2 and -3 and ECM
6. CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace cooling fan relays.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.

>> INSPECTION END

Main 12 Causes of Overheating EBS00TKH

OFF 1 ● Blocked radiator ● Visual No blocking —
● Blocked condenser
● Blocked radiator grille
● Blocked bumper
2 ● Coolant mixture ● Coolant tester 50 - 50% coolant mixture See “Engine Coolant Mix-
ture Ratio”, MA-9.
3 ● Coolant level ● Visual Coolant up to MAX level See “Changing Engine
in reservoir tank and radi- Coolant”, LC-18.
ator filler neck
4 ● Radiator cap ● Pressure tester 59 - 98 kPa See “CHENGING RADIA-
(0.59 - 0.98 bar, 0.6 - 1.0 TOR CAP”, LC-12.
kg/cm2, 9 - 14 psi) (Limit)
EC-445
ON*2 5 ● Coolant leaks ● Visual No leaks See “CHENGING COOL-

ING SYSTEM FOR
LEAKS”, LC-13.
ON*2 6 ● Thermostat ● Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot See “Thermostat”, LC-15,
lower radiator hoses and “Radiator”, LC-17.
ON*1 7 ● Cooling fan ● CONSULT-II Operating See trouble diagnosis for

DTC P1217 (EC-433).
OFF 8 ● Combustion gas leak ● Color checker chemical Negative —
tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 ● Coolant temperature ● Visual Gauge less than 3/4 —

gauge when driving
● Coolant overflow to ● Visual No overflow during driving See “Changing Engine
reservoir tank and idling Coolant”, LC-18.
OFF*4 10 ● Coolant return from ● Visual Should be initial level in See “Changing Engine
reservoir tank to radia- reservoir tank Coolant”, LC-18.
tor
OFF 11 ● Cylinder head ● Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- See “Inspection”, EM-45.
gauge mum distortion (warping)
12 ● Cylinder block and pis- ● Visual No scuffing on cylinder See “Inspection”, EM-45.
tons walls or piston
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (55 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to “Overheating Cause Analysis”, LC-25.
Component Inspection EBS00TKI
COOLING FAN RELAYS-1, -2 AND -3

1. Apply 12V direct current between cooling fan relay terminals 1 and 2.
2. Check continuity between cooling fan relay terminals 3 and 5, 6
and 7.
SEF745U
COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2

1. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connectors.
2. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and
check operation.
Terminals
Speed
(+) (−)
Low 1 4
Cooling fan motor
High 1, 2 3, 4
Cooling fan motor should operate.

3. If NG, replace cooling fan motor.
SEF734W
EC-446
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR PFP:16119
Component Description EBS00TKJ

PBIB0145E
tion.
EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TKK

Closed throttle position
P1225 Closed throttle position learning value is excessively ● Electric throttle control actuator
learning performance
1225 low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TKL
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
dure".
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-447
DTC P1225 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TKM

the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1706E

>> INSPECTION END

Remove and Installation EBS00TKN

EC-448
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Component Description EBS00TKO

PBIB0145E
tion.
EC
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TKP

Closed throttle position
P1226 Closed throttle position learning is not performed ● Electric throttle control actuator
learning performance
1226 successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)
problem
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TKQ
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds.
dure".
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-449
DTC P1226 TP SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TKR

the housing.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1706E

>> INSPECTION END

Remove and Installation EBS00TKS

EC-450
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
DTC P1229 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY PFP:16119
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TKT

P1229 Sensor power supply circuit ECM detects a voltage of power source (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is shorted.)
1229 short for sensor is excessively low or high. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
EC
spring.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TKU
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-451
Wiring Diagram EBS00TKV
GEC419A
EC-452
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
power supply
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TKW

2. Loosen and retighten engine ground screws. EC
>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1700E
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

PBIB1705E
3. Check voltage between electric throttle control actuator terminal

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E
EC-453
3. CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR SHORT
● Harness for short to power and short to ground between ECM terminal 47 and electric throttle control
actuator terminal 1.
● ECM pin terminal.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END
EC-454
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH PFP:25551
Component Description EBS00VY4
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for

each button. ECM reads voltage variation of switch, and determines
which button is operated.
Refer to EC-575, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
PBIB1733E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00VY5

EC

● CRUISE switch pressed ON
MAIN SW ● Ignition switch: ON
● CRUISE switch released OFF
● CANCEL switch pressed ON
CANCEL ● Ignition switch: ON
● CANCEL switch released OFF
● ACCEL/RES switch pressed ON
RESUME/ACC ● Ignition switch: ON
● ACCEL/RES switch released OFF
● SET/COAST switch pressed ON
SET SW ● Ignition switch: ON
● SET/COAST switch released OFF
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00VY6

NOTE:
If DTC P1564 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-401.
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC Detecting Condition Possible Cause
Name
● An excessively high voltage signal from the ASCD
steering switch is sent to ECM. ● Harness or connectors
P1564 ASCD steering ● ECM detects that input signal from the ASCD (The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
1564 switch steering switch is out of the specified range. ● ASCD steering switch
● ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch is ● ECM
stuck ON.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00VY7
NOTE:
EC-455
WITH CONSULT-II
4. Press CRUISE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press ACCEL/RES switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
7. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
3. Press CRUISE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press ACCEL/RES switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
EC-456
Wiring Diagram EBS00VY8
EC
GEC420A
EC-457
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
Approximately 4.0V
● ASCD steering switch is OFF.
Approximately 0V
● CRUISE switch is ON.
G/Y [Ignition switch ON]

99 ASCD steering switch Approximately 1V
● CANCEL switch is ON.
Approximately 2V
● SET/COAST switch is ON.
Approximately 3V
● ACCEL/RES switch is ON.
EC-458
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00VY9
1. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW”, “SET SW” and “CANCEL SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-II.
3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
Switch Monitor item Condition Indication
Pressed ON
CRUISE MAIN SW
Released OFF
Pressed ON
SET/COAST SET SW EC
Released OFF
Pressed ON
ACCEL/RES RESUME/ACC SW
Released OFF
SEC006D
Pressed ON
CANCEL CANCEL SW
Released OFF
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 99 and ground with press-
ing each button.
Switch Condition Voltage [V]
Pressed Approx. 0
CRUISE SW
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 2
SET/COAST SW
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 3
ACCEL/RES SW PBIB0311E
Released Approx. 4
Pressed Approx. 1
CANCEL SW
Released Approx. 4
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 2.
EC-459
2. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Disconnect ASCD steering switch harness connector.
4. Check harness continuity between ASCD steering switch termi-
nal 2 and ECM terminal 57. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1733E

● Harness connectors M65, F104.
● Spiral cable
● Harness for open and short between ECM and ASCD steering switch
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground short to power in harness or connectors.
4. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 99 and ASCD steering switch terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

● Spiral cable
● Harness for open and short between ECM and ASCD steering switch
6. CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Refer to EC-461, "Component Inspection"
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace ASCD steering switch.
EC-460
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00VYA
ASCD STEERING SWITCH

1. Disconnect ASCD steering switch.
2. Check continuity between ASCD steering switch terminals 1 and
2 with pushing each switch.
Switch Condition Resistance [Ω]
Pressed Approx. 0
CRUISE SW EC
Released Approx. 4,000
Pressed Approx. 660
SET/COAST SW
MBIB0236E
Pressed Approx. 1,480
ACCEL/RES SW
Pressed Approx. 250
CANCEL SW
EC-461
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description EBS00VYB
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
PBIB1734E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00VYC

BRAKE SW 1 ● Brake pedal fully released ON

(ASCD brake switch) ● Brake pedal depressed OFF
BRAKE SW 2 ● Brake pedal fully released OFF

(stop lamp switch) ● Brake pedal depressed ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00VYD

NOTE:
If DTC P 1572 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605. Refer to
EC-401.
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
(The stop lamp switch circuit is open or
shorted.)
● When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp
(The ASCD brake switch circuit is open or
switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent
P1572 shorted.)
ASCD brake switch to the ECM at the same time.
1572 ● Stop lamp switch
● ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to
ECM for an extremely long time while the ● ASCD brake switch
vehicle is driving. ● Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
● Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
● ECM
DTC confirmation Procedure EBS00VYE
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
EC-462
3. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following condition.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-465, "Diagnostic Procedure".

If DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
Depress the brake pedal for more than
Driving location five seconds so as not to come off from
the above-mentioned condition.
5. If DTC is detected, go to EC-465, "Diagnostic Procedure". EC
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
TESTING CONDITION:
1. Start engine.
If DTC is detected, go to EC-465, "Diagnostic Procedure".
If DTC is not detected, go to the following step.
Depress the brake pedal for more than
Driving location five seconds so as not to come off from
the above-mentioned condition.
EC-463
Wiring Diagram EBS00VYF
GEC421A
EC-464
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal is fully released
● Brake pedal is depressed (11 - 14V)

[Ignition switch ON] EC
Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00VYG
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
CONDITION INDICATION
When brake pedal is depressed OFF
When brake pedal is fully released ON
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is depressed Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is fully released Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-465
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON
SEC013D
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
MBIB0060E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> GO TO 8.
EC-466
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
PBIB1734E
EC
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0857E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
EC-467
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
8. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
PBIB1734E
3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch terminal 1 and ground

with CONSULT -II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
PBIB1184E

● Fuse block (J/B) connector M2.
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
EC-468
● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
12. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch. EC
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00VYH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
When brake pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to “BRAKE
PEDAL AND BRACKET”, BR-10, and perform step 3 again.
SEC023D
STOP LAMP SWITCH

1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
When brake pedal is fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to “BRAKE

PBIB1202E
EC-469
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR PFP:31036
Component Description EBS00VYI
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combina-
tion meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD
control. Refer to EC-575, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD functions.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00VYJ

The MIL will not light up for this self-diagnosis.
NOTE:
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-327, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE".
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0500, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0500.
Refer to EC-395, "DTC P0500 VSS"
● If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC P0605, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0605.
Refer to EC-401, "DTC P0605 ECM"
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
P1574 ASCD vehicle speed ECM detects a difference between two vehicle
1574 sensor speed signals is out of the specified range. ● Combination meter
● TCM
● ECM
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00VYK
CAUTION:
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
Step 3 may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a road test
is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
WITH CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
3. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH) for at least 5 seconds.
3. Stop vehicle.
EC-470
DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00VYL
1. CHECK DTC WITH TCM

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to AT section.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER

Check combination meter function.
>> INSPECTION END

EC
EC-471
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Description EBS00TKX
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed.
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TKY

BRAKE SW ● Ignition switch: ON
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TKZ

P1805 A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for an (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
Brake switch
1805 extremely long time while the vehicle is driving.
● Stop lamp switch
FALI-SAFE MODE
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TL0
WITH CONSULT-II
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC with CONSULT-II.
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
2. Fully depress the brake pedal at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results) memory. Refer to EC-265.
EC-472
Wiring Diagram EBS00TL1
EC
GEC477A
EC-473
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal fully released
[Ignition switch OFF] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Brake pedal depressed (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TL2
1. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
Depressed Illuminated
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 2.
EC-474
PBIB1716E
EC
PBIB1734E

PBIB0117E
PBIB1184E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-475
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open and short between stop lamp switch and battery
PBIB1716E
PBIB1734E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-476
Component Inspection EBS00TL3
STOP LAMP SWITCH

M/T Models
PBIB1716E
EC
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Brake pedal fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal depressed Should exist.
If NG, adjust brake pedal installation, refer to “BRAKE PEDAL

AND BRACKET”, BR-10, and perform step 2 again.
PBIB0118E
A/T Models
PBIB1716E
PBIB1734E
EC-477
2. Check continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2
under the following conditions.
Brake pedal fully released Should not exist.
Brake pedal depressed Should exist.
If NG, adjust brake pedal installation, refer to “BRAKE PEDAL

AND BRACKET”, BR-10, and perform step 2 again.
PBIB1185E
EC-478
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
Component Description EBS00TL4
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometers which transform the accelerator pedal
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM.
In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of
the accelerator pedal and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The
ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal from
these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these
signals.
PBIB1741E
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper- EC
ation such as fuel cut.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TL5


ACCEL SEN1

ACCEL SEN2*
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TL6

Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 1 ● Harness or connectors
P2122
sensor 1 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 1 circuit is open or
shorted.)
Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 1
P2123 ● Accelerator pedal position sensor
sensor 1 circuit high input is sent to ECM. (Accelerator pedal position sensor 1)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
The ECM regulates the opening speed of throttle valve to be slower than the normal condition.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TL7
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
EC-479
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-480
Wiring Diagram EBS00TL8
EC
GEC424A
EC-481
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

Sensor ground
83 B (Accelerator pedal position [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 0V
sensor 2)
Sensor power supply
sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
98 LG
106 L
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TL9

>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1700E
EC-482
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness
connector.
PBIB1707E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 6 and ground with EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0914E

Check to following.
● Harness for open or short between APP sensor and ECM
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

4. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 3 and ECM terminal 82, TCM terminal 42.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

Check to following.
● Harness for open or short between APP sensor and TCM
EC-483
6. CHECK APP SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

Check to following.
8. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
9. REPLACE APP SENSOR

1. Replace the accelerator pedal position sensor.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TLA
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR

3. Check voltage between ECM terminals 106 (APP sensor 1 sig-
nal), 98 (APP sensor 2 signal) and engine ground under the fol-
lowing conditions.
106 Fully released 0.5 - 1.0V
(Accelerator pedal position
sensor 1) Fully depressed 3.9 - 4.7V

MBIB0023E
EC-484
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step.
Remove and Installation EBS00TLB
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Refer to “ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM (WITH THREE WAY CATALYST)”, FE-5.
EC
EC-485
DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
Component Description EBS00TLC

signals.
PBIB1741E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper-
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TLD


ACCEL SEN1

ACCEL SEN2*
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differ from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TLE

P2127 Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the APP sensor 2 ● Harness or connectors
2127 sensor 2 circuit low input is sent to ECM. (The APP sensor 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
P2128 Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the APP sensor 2
● Accelerator pedal position sensor
2128 sensor 2 circuit high input is sent to ECM. (Accelerator pedal position sensor 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TLF
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
EC-486
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC
EC-487
Wiring Diagram EBS00TLG
GEC425A
EC-488
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

Sensor ground
sensor 2)
Sensor power supply
EC
sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
98 LG
106 L
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TLH

>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1700E
EC-489
2. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
connector.
PBIB1707E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminal 4 and ground with

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0915E
3. DETECT MALFUNCITIONING PART

Check to the following.
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors
4. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

EC-490
6. CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

● Harness connectors M65, F104 EC
8. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TLI

lowing conditions.

MBIB0023E
EC-491
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next step.
Remove and Installation EBS00TLJ
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-492
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Component Description EBS00TLK

PBIB0145E
tion.
EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TLL

(Engine stopped)
THRTL SEN1
1st (M/T models)
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TLM

● Harness or connector
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The TP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is open or
P2135 shorted.)
circuit range/performance compared with the signals from TP sensor 1
2135
problem and TP sensor 2. ● Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 and 2)
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TLN
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
EC-493
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-494
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
Wiring Diagram EBS00TLO
EC
GEC406A
EC-495
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
CAUTION:
TERMI- WIRE
ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NAL NO. COLOR
Sensor power supply
● Engine stopped
● Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
Sensor ground
● Idle speed
● Engine stopped
● Engine stopped
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TLP

>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1700E
EC-496
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
2. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PBIB1705E

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0082E
3. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 49 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 4, ECM
terminal 68 and electric throttle control actuator terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.
EC-497
DTC P2135 TP SENSOR
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TLQ

conditions.


step.
Remove and Installation EBS00TLR

EC-498
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR
DTC P2138 APP SENSOR PFP:18002
Component Description EBS00TLS

signals.
PBIB1741E
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine oper- EC
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TLT


ACCEL SEN1

ACCEL SEN2*
*: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal is converted by ECM internally. Thus, it differs from ECM terminal voltage signal.
On Board Diagnosis Logic EBS00TLU

● Harness or connector
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (The APP sensor 1 and 2 circuit is
Accelerator pedal position sensor open or shorted.)
P2138 compared with the signals from APP sensor
circuit range/performance problem
1 and APP sensor 2. ● Accelerator pedal position sensor 1
and 2
FAIL-SAFE MODE
degrees.
DTC Confirmation Procedure EBS00TLV
NOTE:
TESTING CONDITION:
EC-499
WITH CONSULT-II
SEF058Y
WITHOUT CONSULT-II
EC-500
Wiring Diagram EBS00TLW
EC
GEC426A
EC-501
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.

Sensor ground
sensor 2)
Sensor power supply
sensor 1)
Sensor power supply
sensor 2)
98 LG
106 L
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TLX

>> GO TO 2.
PBIB1700E
EC-502
2. CHECK APP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
connector.
PBIB1707E
3. Check voltage between APP sensor terminals 4, 6 and ground EC

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0560E

● Harness for open or short between ECM and APP sensor
4. CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

4. Check harness continuity between APP sensor terminal 1 and ECM terminal 83, APP sensor terminal 3
and ECM terminal 82, TCM terminal 42. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5

● Harness for open or short between APP sensor and TCM
EC-503
6. CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 106 and APP sensor terminal 5, ECM terminal 98 and
APP sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and APP sensor
8. CHECK APP SENSOR

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TLY

EC-504
lowing conditions.

MBIB0023E
4. If NG, replace accelerator pedal assembly and go to the next

step.
6. Perform EC-256, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". EC
Remove and Installation EBS00TLZ
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
EC-505
HO2S1 HEATER
HO2S1 HEATER PFP:22690
Description EBS00TM0
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 1 Heated oxygen sensor 1
heater control heater
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the heated oxygen sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine
speed and engine coolant temperature. The duty percent varies with engine coolant temperature when engine
is started.
OPERATION
Engine speed rpm Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater
Above 3,600 OFF
Below 3,600 after warming up ON
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TM1

ON
HO2S1 HTR (B1) ● Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm
● Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
EC-506
HO2S1 HEATER
Wiring Diagram EBS00TM2
EC
GEC400A
EC-507
HO2S1 HEATER
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
MINA ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
COLOR
L NO.
Approximately 7.0V
[Engine is running]
● Warm-up condition.
● Engine speed is below 3,600 rpm.
Heated oxygen sensor 1
24 G
heater
PBIB0519E

● Engine stopped. BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running] (11 - 14V)
● Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TM3
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION CHECK

4. Set the tester probe between ECM terminal 24 (HO2S1 heater signal) and ground.
6. Check the voltage under the following conditions.
Verify that the oscilloscope screen shows the signal wave as
shown below.
Conditions Voltage
Approximately 7.0V
At idle
MBIB0038E
PBIB0519E
BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine speed is above 3,600 rpm
(11 - 14V)
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END.
NG >> GO TO 2.
EC-508
HO2S1 HEATER
2. CHECK HO2S1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PBIB1704E
EC
4. Check voltage between HO2S1 terminal 3 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0112E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 1 and fuse
4. CHECK HO2S1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
EC-509
HO2S1 HEATER
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TM4
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER

1. Check resistance between HO2S1 terminals as follows.
Terminal No. Resistance
2 and 3 3.3 - 4.0 Ω at 25°C (77°F)
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)
2. If NG, replace heated oxygen sensor 1.

CAUTION:
from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard sur-
face such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system
threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread Cleaner tool J-43897-
18 or J-43897-12 and approved anti-seize lubricant.
SEF249Y
Removal and Installation EBS00TM5

EC-510
IAT SENSOR
IAT SENSOR PFP:22630
Component Description EBS00TM6
The intake air temperature sensor is built into mass air flow sensor.
The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a signal to
the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the temperature rise.
PBIB1604E
EC
<Reference data>
Intake air
25 (77) 3.32 1.94 - 2.06
80 (176) 1.23 0.295 - 0.349
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminal 34
(Intake air temperature sensor) and body ground.
CAUTION:
Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output SEF012P
voltage. Doing so may result in damage to the ECM's transistor.
Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the ground.
EC-511
IAT SENSOR
Wiring Diagram EBS00TM7
GEC402A
EC-512
IAT SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TM8

SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: Approximately 0 - 4.8V
OK or NG
OK >> INSPECTION END.
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0041E EC
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (intake air temperature sensor
is built-into) harness connector.
PBIB1701E
4. Check voltage between mass air flow sensor terminal 5 and

ground.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1169E
3. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 75 and mass air flow sensor terminal 6.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
EC-513
IAT SENSOR
4. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TM9
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

1. Check resistance between intake air temperature sensor termi-
nals 5 and 6 under the following conditions.
Intake air temperature °C (°F) Resistance kΩ
25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06
2. If NG, replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature
sensor).
PBIB1604E
SEF012P
EC-514
HO2S1
HO2S1 PFP:22690
Component Description EBS00TMB

SEF463R
EC
SEF288D
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TMC

HO2S1 (B1) 0 - 0.3V ←→ Approx. 0.6 - 1.0V
● Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm LEAN ←→ RICH
HO2S1 MNTR (B1) Changes more than 5 times dur-
ing 10 seconds.
EC-515
HO2S1
Wiring Diagram EBS00TMD
GEC400A
EC-516
HO2S1
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
[Engine is running]

(Heated oxygen sensor) ● Idle speed
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TME

EC
1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “HO2S1 MNTR (B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make
sure that the monitors fluctuate between LEAN and RICH more
than five times in 10 seconds.
1 time: RICH → LEAN → RICH
2 times: RICH → LEAN → RICH → LEAN → RICH
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
SEF646Y

Without CONSULT-II
3. Keep the engine speed at 2,000 rpm under no load, and make
sure that the voltage fluctuates between 0 to 0.3V and 0.6 to
1.0V more than five times in 10 seconds.
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 4.
MBIB0018E
EC-517
HO2S1
>> GO TO 5.
PBIB1700E
5. RETIGHTEN HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1

Loosen and retighten heated oxygen sensor 1.
Tightening torque: 40 - 60 N·m (4.1 - 6.2 kg-m, 30 - 44 ft-
lb)
>> GO TO 6.
PBIB1703E
6. CHECK FOR EXHAUST GAS LEAK

1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leak before three way catalyst (Manifold).
PBIB1752E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAK

Listen for an intake air leak after the mass air flow sensor.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
EC-518
HO2S1
2. Disconnect HO2S1 harness connector.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power PBIB1704E
in harness or connectors. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
10. CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 1 HEATER

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
12. CHECK PCV VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace PCV valve.

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 14.
NG >> Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 1.
EC-519
HO2S1
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TMF

With CONSULT-II
II.
ing steps.
SEF646Y

onds.
SEF217YA
SEF648Y
CAUTION:
● Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
Without CONSULT-II
EC-520
HO2S1
1 time: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V

2 times: 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V → 0 - 0.3V → 0.6 - 1.0V
CAUTION: MBIB0018E

from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new
one.
● Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread EC
Removal and Installation EBS00TMG

EC-521
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PFP:14920
Description EBS00TMH
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed*2
Battery Battery voltage*2 EVAP canister purge
EVAP canister
volume control solenoid
Throttle position sensor Throttle position purge flow control
valve
Accelerator pedal position sensor Closed throttle position
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Heated oxygen sensors 1
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)

This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor by-pass pas-
sage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the flow rate. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation according to the signal sent from the
ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is
determined by considering various engine conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor
from the EVAP canister is regulated as the air flow changes.
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/
OFF duty to control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canis-
ter. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse,
the greater the amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
SEF337U
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TMI

● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
PURG VOL C/V Neutral (M/T models) 2,000 rpm 15 - 30%
● No-load
EC-522
Wiring Diagram EBS00TMJ
EC
GEC470A
EC-523
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● Idle speed (11 - 14V)
Approximately 10V
EVAP canister purge
19 GY/L volume control solenoid
valve [Engine is running]
● Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm
PBIB0520E
EC-524
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TMK

With CONSULT-II
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canister.
4. Select “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II.
EC
PBIB0569E
6. Change the valve opening percentage with touching “Qu” or

“Qd” on CONSULT-II screen, and check for vacuum existence at
the EVAP purge hose under the following conditions.
Conditions
Vacuum
(PURG VOL CONT/V valve)
0% Should not exist.
100% Should exist.
PBIB1718E
Without CONSULT-II
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose connected to the EVAP canister.
4. Check for vacuum existence at the EVAP purge hose under the
Conditions Vacuum
At idle Should not exist.
Engine speed is about 2,000 rpm. Should exist.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB1718E
2. CHECK EVAP CANISTER

OK or NG
NG >> Replace EVAP canister.
EC-525
3. CHECK EVAP PURGE LINE
Check EVAP purge line (pipe, rubber tube, fuel tank and EVAP canister) for cracks or improper connection.
Refer to EC-571, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING".
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> Repair or reconnect the hose.
4. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIR-
CUIT
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
harness connector.
PBIB1717E
4. Check voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
PBIB0148E

● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
● Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM relay
EC-526
6. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIR-
CUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 19 and EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 7.
OK (Without CONSULT-II)>>GO TO 8.
NG >> Repair open circuit or short to ground and short to power in harness or connectors.
EC
7. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-II
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL CONT/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT-II. Check that engine speed varies according to the
valve opening.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB0569E
8. CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-527
Component Inspection EBS00TML

With CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL CONT/V value) between A and B
100% Yes
0% No
PBIB0149E
Without CONSULT-II
Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve under the following conditions.
Air passage continuity
Condition
between A and B
12V direct current supply between
Yes
terminals 1 and 2
No supply No
PBIB0150E
Removal and Installation EBS00TMM

EC-528
PNP SWITCH
PNP SWITCH PFP:32006
Component Description EBS00TMT
When the gear position is P (A/T models only) or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON.
ECM detects the position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TMU

Shift lever:
P or N (A/T models) ON
EC
EC-529
PNP SWITCH
Wiring Diagram EBS00TMV
GEC422A
EC-530
PNP SWITCH
CAUTION:
TER-
MINAL WIRE COLOR ITEM CONDITION DATA (DC Voltage)
NO.
● Shift lever position is P or N (A/T models) Approximately 0V
Neutral (M/T models).
102 G/OR PNP switch A/T models
[Ignition switch “ON”] BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
● Except the above gear position M/T models
Approximately 5V EC
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TMW

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
SULT-II.
3. Check the “P/N POSI SW” signal under the following conditions.
Selector lever position P/N POSI SW signal
P and N position (A/T models)
ON
Neutral position (M/T models)
Except the above position OFF
PBIB0102E
Without CONSULT-II
Selector lever position Voltage
P and N position (A/T models)
Approximately 0V
Neutral position (M/T models)
A/T models: Battery voltage
Except the above position
M/T models: Approximately 5V
MBIB0043E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
EC-531
PNP SWITCH
2. CHECK PNP SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect PNP switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between PNP switch terminal 2 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.

● Harness for open or short between Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch and ground
4. CHECK PNP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 102 and PNP switch terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
5. CHECK PNP SWITCH

Refer to “TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS”, AT-167 or “PNP SWITCH”, MT-15.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> Replace PNP switch.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-532
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
INJECTOR CIRCUIT PFP:16600
Component Description EBS00TMX
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the injector circuit, the coil in the injector is
energized. The energized coil pulls the needle valve back and allows
fuel to flow through the injector into the intake manifold. The amount
of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse
duration is the length of time the injector remains open. The ECM
controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
SEF375Z
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TMY

EC

● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
● No-load
● Shift lever:
N (A/T models)
● No-load
EC-533
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram EBS00TMZ
GEC431A
EC-534
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
● Idle speed
EC
22 G/B Injector No. 3
23 R/B Injector No. 1 PBIB0529E
41 L/B Injector No. 4 BATTERY VOLTAGE

(11 - 14V)
[Engine is running]
PBIB0530E
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TN0
1. INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Is any cylinder ignited?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 3.
EC-535
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
CONSULT-II.
3. Make sure that each circuit produces a momentary engine
speed drop.
PBIB0133E
Without CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each injector operating sound.
PBIB1725E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-536
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
3. CHECK INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PBIB1719E
EC
4. Check voltage between injector terminal 1 and ground with
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0582E

● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between injector and fuse
5. CHECK INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check harness continuity between injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 22, 23, 41, 42.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
6. CHECK INJECTOR
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> Replace injector.
EC-537
INJECTOR CIRCUIT
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TN1
INJECTOR
2. Check resistance between injector terminals as shown in the fig-
ure.
PBIB1727E
Removal and Installation EBS00TN2
INJECTOR
Refer to EC-261, "Injector".
EC-538
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT PFP:17042
Description EBS00TN3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control Fuel pump relay
Battery *
Battery voltage
*: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned on to improve engine
startability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the crankshaft position sensor (POS) and cam-
shaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the
engine speed signal is not received when the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump
operation and prevents battery discharging, thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel EC
pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation
Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
A turbine type design fuel pump is used in the fuel tank.
PBIB1721E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TN4

● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY ● Engine running or cranking
● Except above conditions OFF
EC-539
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram EBS00TN5
GEC479A
EC-540
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
● For 1 seconds after turning ignition switch ON 0 - 1.0V
*1 [Engine is running]
113
B/P Fuel pump relay
(114)*2 [Ignition switch ON]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
● More than 1 seconds after turning ignition switch (11 - 14V)
ON.
*1: Without NATS. EC
*2: With NATS.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TN6

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel hose for 1
second after ignition switch is turned ON.
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
PBIB1722E
EC-541
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
2. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect fuel pump relay.
PBIB1720E
4. Check voltage between fuel pump relay terminals 1, 5 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
PBIB0303E

● Fuse block (J/B) connector B4
● 10A fuse
● 15A fuse
● Harness for open or short between fuel pump relay and fuse
4. CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
nector.
3. Check harness continuity between fuel pump relay terminal 3
and fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5, fuel level
sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 3 and body ground.
OK or NG
PBIB1723E
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.
EC-542
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
● Harness for open or short between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump and fuel pump relay
● Harness for open or short between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump and body ground
6. CHECK CONDENSER CIRCUIT

2. Check harness continuity between fuel pump relay terminal 3 and condenser terminal 1, condenser termi-
nal 2 and body ground. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist. EC
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
7. CHECK CONDENSER
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
8. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 113 (Without NATS) or 114 (With NATS) and fuel pump
relay terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and fuel pump relay
10. CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> Replace fuel pump relay.
EC-543
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
11. CHECK FUEL PUMP
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> Replace fuel pump.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00TN7
FUEL PUMP RELAY

Check continuity between fuel pump relay terminals 3 and 5 under
the following conditions.
Yes
PBIB0098E
FUEL PUMP
nector.
PBIB1723E
2. Check resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
terminals 3 and 5.
Resistance: Approximately 1.0Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
PBIB0658E
CONDENSER
EC-544
FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals 1 and 2.
MBIB0031E
Removal and Installation EBS00TN8
FUEL PUMP
Refer to “Fuel Level Sensor Unit, Fuel Filter and Fuel Pump Assembly”, FE-11.
EC
EC-545
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR PFP:92136
Component Description EBS00TN9
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the liquid tank of the

air conditioner system. The sensor uses an electrostatic volume
pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The
voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
PBIB1724E
SEF099X
EC-546
Wiring Diagram EBS00TNA
EC
GEC433A
EC-547
CAUTION:
TERMI-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Sensor power supply
46 R [Ignition switch ON] Approximately 5V
(Refrigerant pressure sensor)
(Power steering pressure
sensor/Refrigerant pressure
sensor) ● Idle speed
[Engine is running]
69 R/L Refrigerant pressure sensor 1.0 - 4.0V
● Both A/C switch and blower switch are ON.
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TNB
1. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR OVERALL FUNCTION

2. Turn A/C switch and blower switch ON.
SULT-II or tester.
Voltage: 1.0 - 4.0V
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 2.
MBIB0035E
EC-548
2. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn A/C switch and blower switch OFF.
2. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
PBIB1724E EC
5. Check voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 3

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 3.
SEF479Y

● Harness for open or short between refrigerant pressure sensor and ECM
4. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 57 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 1.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 5.

EC-549
6. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 69 and refrigerant pressure sensor terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 8.
NG >> GO TO 7.


OK or NG
OK >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
EC-550
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL PFP:25350
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00TNE

ON
OFF

HEATER FAN SW
EC
EC-551
Wiring Diagram EBS00TNF
GEC480A
EC-552
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Electrical load signal ● Lighting switch is 2ND position (11 - 14V)
84 R/W
(Headlamp signal) [Ignition switch “ON””]
Approximately 0V
● Lighting switch is OFF
Electrical load signal ● Rear window defogger switch is ON (11 - 14V)
93 L/R (Rear window defog-
[Ignition switch ON] EC
ger signal) Approximately 0V
● Rear window defogger switch is OFF
Approximately 0V
Heater fan switch sig- ● Heater fan control switch is ON
96 LG/B
nal [Ignition switch ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
● Heater fan control switch is OFF (11 - 14V)
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00TNG
1. INSPECTION START
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> GO TO 5.
2. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II
2. Check “LOAD SIGNAL” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CON-
Condition LOAD SIGNAL
Lighting switch ON at 2nd position ON
Lighting switch OFF OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 3.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB0103E
EC-553
3. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
Rear window defogger switch ON ON
Rear window defogger switch OFF OFF
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 4.
NG >> GO TO 12.
PBIB0103E
4. CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION

With CONSULT-II
Heater fan control switch ON ON
Heater fan control switch OFF OFF
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 16.
PBIB0103E
5. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-I

Without CONSULT-II
Condition Voltage
Lighting switch ON at 2nd position BATTERY VOLTAGE
Lighting switch OFF 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 6.
NG >> GO TO 8.
PBIB0674E
EC-554
6. CHECK LOAD SIGNAL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION-II
Without CONSULT-II
Condition Voltage
Rear window defogger switch ON BATTERY VOLTAGE
Rear window defogger switch OFF 0V
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 12.
EC
PBIB0660E
7. CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT OVERALL FUNCTION

Without CONSULT-II
Condition Voltage
Heater fan control switch ON 0V
heater fan control switch OFF BATTERY VOLTEGE
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 16.
PBIB1219E
8. CHECK HEADLAMP FUNCTION

1. Start engine.
2. Turn the lighting switch ON at 2nd position.
3. Check that headlamps are illuminated.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 9.
NG >> Refer to “HEADLAMP”, EL-34.
9. CHECK HEADLAMP INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect lighting switch harness connectors.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 84 and lighting switch terminal 12.
Continuity should exist
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 11.
NG >> GO TO 10.
EC-555
● Harness for open and short between ECM and lighting switch

>> INSPECTION END
12. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FUNCTION

1. Start engine.
2. Turn ON the rear window defogger switch.
3. Check the rear windshield. Is the rear windshield heated up?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 13.
No >> Refer to “REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER”, EL-146.
13. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
1. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
4. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 93 and rear window defogger relay terminal 3.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 15.
NG >> GO TO 14.

● Harness connectors B3, M19.
● Harness for open and short between ECM and harness rear window defogger relay.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-556
16. CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL FUNCTION
1. Start engine.
2. Turn ON the fan control switch.
3. Check the blower fan motor. Does the blower fan motor activate?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 17.
No >> Refer to “Blower Motor”, HA-73 or HA-171.
17. CHECK HEATER FAN SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT

1. Stop engine.
3. Disconnect heater control panel harness connector. EC
4. Check harness continuity between following.
– ECM terminal 96 and heater control panel terminal 18 (without auto A/C).
– ECM terminal 96 and heater control panel terminal 19 (with auto A/C).
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 19.
NG >> GO TO 18.

● Harness for open and short between ECM and heater control panel.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-557
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH PFP:25320
Component Description EBS00VYM
When depress on the brake pedal, ASCD brake switch is turned

OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. ECM detects the state of
the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal)
PBIB1734E
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00VYN

BRAKE SW 1 ● Brake pedal fully released ON

(ASCD brake switch) ● Brake pedal depressed OFF
BRAKE SW 2 ● Brake pedal fully released OFF

(stop lamp switch) ● Brake pedal depressed ON
EC-558
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Wiring Diagram EBS00VYO
EC
GEC435A
EC-559
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
CAUTION:
TER-
WIRE
COLOR
NO.
Approximately 0V
● Brake pedal is fully released
● Brake pedal is depressed (11 - 14V)

Approximately 0V
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00VYP
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-II
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.
When brake pedal is depress OFF
When brake pedal is fully released ON
SEC011D
Without CONSULT-II
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is depress Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is fully released Battery voltage
MBIB0061E
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 2.
NG >> GO TO 3.
EC-560
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-II
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
When brake pedal is released OFF
When brake pedal is depressed ON
SEC013D EC
Without CONSULT-II
Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following conditions.
CONDITION VOLTAGE
When brake pedal is released Approximately 0V
When brake pedal is depressed Battery voltage
MBIB0060E
OK or NG
NG >> GO TO 8.
EC-561
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
PBIB1734E
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 5.
NG >> GO TO 4.
PBIB0857E

● Fuse block (J/B) connectors M1.
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
5. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 7.
NG >> GO TO 6.

● Harness for open or short between ECM and ASCD brake switch
EC-562
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
7. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace ASCD brake switch.

EC
PBIB1734E

with CONSULT -II or tester.
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 10.
NG >> GO TO 9.
PBIB1184E

● Fuse block (J/B) connectors M2.
● 10A fuse
● Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and fuse
OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 12.
NG >> GO TO 11.
EC-563
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
● Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch

OK or NG
OK >> GO TO 13.
NG >> Replace stop lamp switch.

>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection EBS00VZE
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
When brake pedal is fully released. Should exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should not exist.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to “BRAKE
SEC023D
STOP LAMP SWITCH

3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following conditions.
When brake pedal is fully released. Should not exist.
When brake pedal is depressed. Should exist.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to “BRAKE

PBIB1202E
EC-564
ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR PFP:24814
Component Description EBS00VYQ
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators, CRUISE and
SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when CRUISE switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that
ASCD system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
● CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
● SET switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range of ASCD set-
ting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control.
Refer to EC-575, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode EBS00VYR
EC
Specification data are reference value.
CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON
● CRUISE switch: ON ● SET/COAST switch pressed ON
SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is

between 40 km/h (25 MPH) ● SET/COAST switch released OFF
and 130 km/h (80 MPH)
EC-565
ASCD INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram EBS00VYS
GEC436A
EC-566
ASCD INDICATOR
Diagnostic Procedure EBS00VYU

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION
CRUISE LAMP ● Ignition switch: ON
● CRUISE switch: ON ● COAST/SET switch pressed ON
SET LAMP ● When vehicle speed is

between 40 km/h (25 MPH) ● COAST/SET switch released OFF
and 130 km/h (80 MPH)
OK or NG
EC
NG >> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DTC
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001is not displayed.
OK or NG
OK >> Perform trouble diagnoses for DTC U1000, U1001, refer to EC-327, "DTC U1000, U1001 CAN
COMMUNICATION LINE".
NG >> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION

Does combination meter operate normally?
Yes or No
Yes >> GO TO 4.
No >> Check combination meter circuit. Refer to “METERS AND GAUGES”, EL-86.

>> INSPECTION END
EC-567
MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR PFP:24814
Wiring Diagram EBS00TNH
GEC427A
EC-568
EC
GEC437A
EC-569
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PFP:14950
Description EBS00TNJ
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PBIB0491E
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
EC-570
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING
EC
MBIB0014E
EC-571
Component Inspection EBS00TNK
EVAP CANISTER
Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B. Orally blow air through port A.
Check that air flows freely through port C.
2. Block port A. Orally blow air through port B.
Check that air flows freely through port C.
SEF917W
FUEL CHECK VALVE

1. Blow air through connector on fuel tank side.
A considerable resistance should be felt and a portion of air flow
should be directed toward the EVAP canister side.
2. Blow air through connector on EVAP canister side.
Air flow should be smoothly directed toward fuel tank side.
3. If fuel check valve is suspected of not properly functioning in
steps 1 and 2 above, replace it.
PBIB0309E
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF989X
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

Pres- 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar,
sure: 0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22 - 2.90 psi)
Vacuum: −6.0 to −3.3 kPa (−0.060 to −0.033 bar,
−0.061 to −0.034 kg/cm2, −0.87 to −0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
SEF943S

EC-572
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION PFP:11810
Description EBS00TNL
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EC
PBIB0492E
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold.

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold. During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the
PCV valve. Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of venti-
lating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air
passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle condition, the manifold
vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow goes through the hose connection
in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
PBIB1588E
Component Inspection EBS00TNM
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over the valve inlet.
PBIB1589E
EC-573
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks.
2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with compressed air. If any hose
cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
S-ET277
EC-574
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD) PFP:18930
System Description EBS00VYV

Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator
ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation Electric throttle control
ASCD vehicle speed control
Park/Neutral position (PNP) actuator
Gear position
switch
Combination meter Vehicle speed
TCM Powertrain revolution
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM EC

Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 130 km/h (80 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE indicator and SET indicator in combination meter. If any
malfunction occurs in ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
SET OPERATION
Press ASCD CRUISE switch (Main switch). (The CRUISE indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 130 km/h (80
MPH), press SET switch. (Then SET indicator in combination meter illuminates.)
ACCEL OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCEL switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until the
switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
● CANCEL switch is pressed
● More than 2 switches at ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared.).
● Selector lever is changed to N, P, R position.
● Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
● Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature: CRUISE lamp may
blink slowly.
When the engine coolant temperature decrease to the normal operating temperature, CRUISE lamp will
stop blinking and the cruise operation will be able to work by depressing SET switch or RESUME switch.
● Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: SET lamp will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF during ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle
speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the
switch is released. And then ASCD will keep the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
When the RESUME/ACCEL switch is pressed after cancel operation other than pressing MAIN switch is per-
formed, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet
EC-575
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
● Brake pedal is released.
● A/T selector lever is in other than P and N positions
● Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 130 km/h (80 MPH)
Component Description EBS00VYW
ASCD STEERING SWITCH

Refer to EC-455.
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-462, and EC-558.
ASCD CLUTCH SWITCH
Refer to EC-462 and EC-558.
STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-462, EC-472 and EC-558.
Refer to EC-413, EC-415, EC-422 and EC-428.
ASCD INDICATOR
Refer to EC-565.
EC-576
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) PFP:00030
Fuel Pressure EBS00TNN
Fuel pressure at idle Approximately 350 kPa (3.5 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing EBS00TNO
QG13DE QG16DE QG18DE

A/T No-load*1 (in P or N position) 750±50 rpm 750±50 rpm 700±50 rpm
Target idle speed
M/T No-load*1 (in Neutral position) 680±50 rpm 630±50 rpm 630±50 rpm
A/T In P or N position 850 rpm or more
Air conditioner: ON
M/T In Neutral position 800 rpm or more
A/T In P or N position 6±5° BTDC 10±5° BTDC 10±5° BTDC
Ignition timing EC
M/T In Neutral position 2±5° BTDC 8±5° BTDC 8±5° BTDC
*1: Under the following conditions:
● Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
● Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Mass Air Flow Sensor EBS00TNP
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 - 14V)

Output voltage at idle Approximately 0.8*V
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no-load.
Intake Air Temperature Sensor EBS00TNQ

25 (77) 1.94 - 2.06
80 (176) 0.295 - 0.349
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor EBS00TNR

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater EBS00TNS
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] 3.3 - 4.0Ω
Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS) EBS00TNU

Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE) EBS00TNV

Throttle Control Motor EBS00TNW
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1 - 15Ω
Injector EBS00TNX
Resistance [at 20°C (68°F)] 13.5 - 17.5Ω
EC-577
Fuel Pump EBS00TNY
Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)] Approximately 1.0Ω
EC-578

Ec PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ec PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

APPLICATION NOTICE PFP:00000

How to Check Vehicle Type EBS00WT4

Check the application of the vehicle type.

Conventional throttle control

Electric throttle control

Alphabetical Index EBS00TNZ

×: Applicable —: Not applicable

Items DTC MIL lighting

A/T COMM LINE P0600 0600 1 — EC-135

DTC No. Index EBS00TO0

×: Applicable —: Not applicable

● Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

● Do not disassemble ECM.

● When connecting or disconnecting ECM harness connec-

● When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

system malfunctions due to receiving external noise,

● Do not shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE)

● After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC

● When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never

● Do not depress accelerator pedal when starting.

● When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure

When you read Wiring diagrams, refer to the following:

Special Service Tools EBS00Y9H

Commercial Service Tools EBS00TO6

Tool name Description

Socket wrench Removing and installing engine coolant tem-

System Diagram — QG13DE Engine Models EBS00TO7

Input (Sensor) ECM Function Output (Actuator)

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System EBS00TOD

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Two types of systems are used.

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Ignition switch Start signal

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure

INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART

Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check EBS00TOI

3. Check ignition timing.

Idle Air Volume Learning EBS00TOJ

8. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.

9. Make sure that “CMPLT” is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If

M/T 630±50 rpm 6±2° BTDC

M/T 630±50 rpm 2±2° BTDC

● Blown fuses related to the IACV-AAC valve system.

Fuel Pressure Check EBS00TOK

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

3. Expand and remove clips securing fuel injectors.

5. Install fuel injectors.

● Be careful not to damage O-rings with service tools fin- SEF927W

ger nails or clips. Do not expand or twist O-rings.

6. Position clips in grooves on fuel injectors.

: Tightning torque N·m (kg·m, ft·lb)

fuel hose, check connection for fuel leakage.

HOW TO READ DTC

A sample of CONSULT-II display is shown at above. The malfunction is displayed in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC

● If the security indicator lights up with the ignition switch in

with CONSULT-II using NATS program card.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION

Engine running MALFUNCTION This is a usual driving condition. When a malfunction is

Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs to be read.

1: EC-227 2: EC-31 *3: EC-227